Home

SMC Networks SMC8624/48T User's Manual

1. Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN awate devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN awate devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame onto the VLAN s indicated by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unaware device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID 3 145 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages
2. Port Configuration 7 Port Name Admin Dome Flow Control Autonegatiation forced Mode Trunk a S S ti oe O P confor e P Penner o med Ot Oe ion Fee O i Pena oar eae ne a Peel s F enn Desa ta opi eE y Figure 3 37 Configuring Port Attributes CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 13 3 168 Console config if description RD SW 13 3 168 Console config if shutdown 3 175 Console config if no shutdown Console config if no negotiation 3 170 Console config if speed duplex 100half 3 169 Console config if flowcontrol 3 173 Conso config if negotiation Conso config if capabilities 100half 3 172 Conso el Le le config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 21 Console config if combo forced mode copper forced 3 174 le Conso config if Creating Trunk Groups You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual ageregate link A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two devices You can create up to six trunks at a time 3 86 PORT CONFIGURATION The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manual
3. jumbo frame This command enables support for jumbo frames Use the no form to disable it Syntax no jumbo frame Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 84 FLASH FILE COMMANDS Command Usage This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm control to 64 packets per second See the switchport broadcast command on page 176 Example Console config jumbo frame Console config Flash File Commands These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files Table 4 19 Flash File Commands Command Function Mode __ Page copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration PE 4 86 to or from flash memory or a TFTP server
4. Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table Table 4 1 Command Modes Class Mode Exec Normal Privileged Config
5. terminal Table 4 5 Line Command Syntax Command Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and GC 4 15 starts the line configuration mode login Enables password checking at login LC 4 16 password Specifies a password on a line LC 4 17 exec timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter LC 4 18 waits until user input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which LC 4 19 limits the number of failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management LC 4 20 console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data bits per character that LC 4 21 are interpreted and generated by hardware patity Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4 22 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4 23 These commands only apply to the serial port line LINE COMMANDS Table 4 5 Line Command Syntax Command Function Mode Page stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per LC 4 24 byte disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 24 show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE 4 25 PE These commands only apply to the serial port This command identifies a specific line for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console
6. show radius server This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 98 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Example Console show radius server Server IP address 10 1 0 1 Communication key with radius server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Console TACACS Client Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 23 TACACS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page tacacs server host Specifies the TACACS server GC 4 99 tacacs server port Specifies the TACACS server network GC 4 100 port tacacs server key Sets the TACACS encryption key GC 4 101 show tacacs server Shows the current TACACS settings GC 4 101 tacacs server host This command specifies the TACACS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server host ost_ip_address no tacacs server host host_ip_address IP address of a TACACS server Default Setting 10 11 12 13 4 99 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Example
7. 3 184 MULTICAST FILTERING Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN 1D 1 Multicast Router List Unit Port11 Static Figure 3 81 Mapping Multicast Switch Ports to VLANs 3 185 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 186 CLI This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 3 283 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Depending on your network
8. 0 3 64 Configuring a MAC ACL 2 eee eee 3 67 Configuring ACL Masks 0 cece cece eee 3 70 Specifying the Mask Type 0 6 00 c cece eee eee 3 70 Configuring an IP ACL Mask 00 0000005 3 71 Configuring a MAC ACL Mask 0 0000004 3 74 Binding a Port to an Access Control List oooo 3 76 iv CONTENTS Filtering Management Access 1 0 3 78 Port Configuration 3 ji dad pak Sa ee dle Mestad a 3 80 Displaying Connection Status 6 0 0 6 c cee eee eee 3 80 Configuring Interface Connections 0 000 eee ee 3 84 Creating Trunk Groups 0 6 cece eee eee 3 86 Statically Configuring a Trunk o oooooooommmo o 3 88 Enabling LACP on Selected Ports ooooo oooooo o 3 89 Configuring LACP Parameters 000 00005 3 91 Displaying LACP Port Counters oooooccccooooo 3 94 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side 3 96 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side 3 99 Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds oooooooomoo o 3 101 Configuring Port Mirroring 1 0 0 eee eee 3 103 Configuring Rate Limits coco a 3 104 Showing Port Statistics spis er iea a a a T 3 106 Address Table Settings s ossea ternesto aad i ea ee 3 112 Setting Static Addresses 0 6 eee eee 3 112 Displaying the Address Table 0 0 0 0 000 c cee eee 3 114 Changing the Aging Time 0 eee eee ee eee 3 115 Spanning Tree Al
9. The revision for this MSTI Range 0 65535 Default 0 The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region Region Name The name for this MSTI Maximum length 32 characters SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Maximum Hop Count The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before a BPDU is discarded Range 1 40 Default 20 The MST name and revision number ate both required to uniquely identify an MST region Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanning Tree State Enabled y Spanning Tree Type MSTP y Priority 0 61440 61440 When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 forward delay 1 Hello Time 1 10 k seconds Maximum Age 6 40 20 seconds Forward Delay 4 30 15 seconds RSTP Configuration Path Cost Method Long y Transmission Limit 1 10 MSTP Configuration Max Instance Numbers 65 Region Revision 065535 f0 Region Name 0000e9313131 Max Hop Count 1 40 20 Figure 3 53 Configuring the Spanning Tree Algorithm 3 125 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol sets the mode to MST and then configures the STA and MSTP parameters Console config spanning tree 3 206 Console conf
10. show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the selected interfaces Syntax show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting The mapping for all interfaces is displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2 Console show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group Port ProtocolGroup ID Vlan ID Eth 1 1 L vlan2 Console 4 247 VLAN COMMANDS Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This section describes commands used to configure private VIANs Table 4 43 Private VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page pvlan Enables and configured private GC 4 248 VLANS show pvlan Displays the configured private PE 4 249 VLANS pvlan This command enables or configures a private VLAN Use the no form to disable the private VLAN Syntax pvlan up link ierface list down link interface hisi no pvlan e up link Specifies an uplink interface e down link Specifies a downlink interface Default Setting No private VLANs are defined Command Mode Global Configuration Comm
11. SSL SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port portnumber no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 4 41 ip http server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 41 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config ip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 4 41 copy tftp https certificate 4 86 ip http secure server 4 42 This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access 1 e an encrypted connection to the switch s Web interface Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http secure server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port Ifyo
12. Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Ports Channel groups Shows the VLAN interface members VLAN CONFIGURATION CLI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 3 242 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups T Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Ethl 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Eth1 7 Eth1 8 Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Eth1 15 Eth1 16 Eth1 17 Eth1 18 Eth1 19 Eth1 20 Eth1 21 Eth1 22 Eth1 23 Eth1 24 Console Creating VLANs Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes e Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN New Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not added to the VLAN tag VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes WLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters e Status Web Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets State CLI
13. Console config tacacs server host 192 168 1 25 Console config tacacs server port This command specifies the TACACS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server port port_number no tacacs server port port_number TACACS server TCP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 49 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ttacacs server port 181 Console config 4 100 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS tacacs server key This command sets the TACACS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server key key_string no tacacs server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server key green Console config show tacacs server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show tacacs server Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 10 11 12 13 Communication key with radius server green Server port number 181 Console 4 101 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Port Security Commands These commands can be used to disable the learning function or manually s
14. Ei If you download to a new destination file then select the file from the drop down box for the operation code used at startup and click Apply Changes To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Start Up Operation Code Image File File Name V1 0 Apply Changes y Figure 3 9 Select Start Up Operation File 3 23 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server select config or opcode file type then enter the source and destination file names set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch Console copy tftp file 3 86 TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name v1000 18 bix Destination file name V1 0 Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console config Console config boot system opcode V1 0 3 92 Console config exit Console reload 3 29 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3 24 You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings Command Attributes TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server File Name The configuration file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP
15. string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only 2 To remove an existing string simply type no snmp server community string where string is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server community admin rw Console config Hsnmp server community private Console config BASIC CONFIGURATION Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch To configure a trap receiver complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server host host address community string where host address is the IP address for the trap receiver and community string is the string associated with that host Press lt Enter gt 2 In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command Type snmp server enable traps Ape where type is either authentication ot link up down Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Saving Configuration Settings Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you m
16. Command Attributes e Protect Status Shows whether ot not broadcast storm control has been enabled Default Enabled e Threshold Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth Options 500 262143 packets per second Default 500 packets per second 3 101 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 102 Web Click Port Port Broadcast Control Set the threshold any port click Apply Port Broadcast Control Port Type Protect Status Threshold 500 262143 Trunk 1 1000Base TX I Enable Bo packets sec 2 1000Base TxX IV Enable Bo packets sec 3 1000Base Tx IV Enable Bo packets sec 4 1000Base TX Y Enable Bo packets sec i 5 fioo0Base Tx M Enable Bo packets sec x Figure 3 44 Enabling Port Broadcast Control CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1 and then sets broadcast suppression at 600 packets per second for port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config if no switchport broadcast 3 176 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if Hswitchport broadcast packet rate 600 3 176 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 2 3 181 Information of Eth 1 2 Broadcast threshold Enabled 600 packets second Lacp status Disabled Ingress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second Egress rate limit disable
17. Console config 1f Htexit Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 12 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config exit Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 00 e8 00 00 0b Configuration Name Port admin status Up Speed duplex Auto Flow control status Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by lacp Link status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Console Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Capabilities 10half 10full 100half Member Ports Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 1000full 4 191 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS lacp system priority This command configures a port s LACP system priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner system priority priority no lacp actor partner system priority e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority This priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the
18. Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Configuring Port Attributes o o oooooommmm oo 3 86 Static Trunk Configuration 0 6 0 0 cee eee eee 3 88 LACP Port Configuratio 0000 0 c eee eee eee 3 90 LACP Aggregation Port Configuration 3 93 Displaying LACP Port Counters Information 3 95 Displaying LACP Port Information 3 98 Displaying Remote LACP Port Information 3 100 Enabling Port Broadcast Control ooo o ooo 3 102 Configuring a Mirror Port 0 00 0 3 104 Configuring Output Port Rate Limiting 3 105 Displaying Port Statistics ooooooommm room 3 110 Displaying Etherlike and RMON Statistics 3 111 Mapping Ports to Static Addresses oo o 3 113 Displaying the MAC Dynamic Address Table 3 114 Setting the Aging Time 0 0 00 cee 3 115 Displaying the Spanning Tree Algorithm 3 120 Configuring the Spanning Tree Algorithm 3 125 Displaying STA Port Status Information 3 130 Configuring Spanning Tree Algorithm per Por
19. HTTP ACCESS CONTROL LISTS 3 Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any 3 120 Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any dport 80 Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any tcp control code 2 2 Console config std acl Configuring a MAC ACL Command Attributes e Action An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules Source Destination MAC Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to indicate a specific MAC address or MAC to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination MAC Address Source or destination MAC address Source Destination MAC Bitmask Hexidecimal mask for source ot destination MAC address VID VLAN ID Range 1 4095 VID Mask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4095 Ethernet Type This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets Range 600 fff hex A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 PX Ethernet Type Mask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex 3 67 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 68 e Packet Format This attribute includes the following
20. Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation e flowcontrol Supports flow control symmetric Gigabit only When specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames Default Setting 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full e 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full e 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands 4 172 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100hal 100full and flow control Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if capabilities 100half Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config 1f Related Commands negotiation 4 170 speed duplex 4 169 flowcontrol 4 173 flowcontrol 4 173 This command enables flow control Use the no form to disable flow control Syntax no flowcontrol Default Setting Flow control enable
21. port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows all GARP timers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 254 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show garp timer ethernet 1 1 Eth 1 1 GARP timer status Join timer 20 centiseconds Leave timer 60 centiseconds Leaveall timer 1000 centiseconds Console Related Commands garp timer 4 253 Priority Commands 4 255 The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Table 4 45 Priority Commands Command Groups Function Page Priority Layer 2 Configures default priority for untagged frames 4 256 sets queue weights and maps class of service tags to hardware queues Priority Layer 3 and 4 Maps TCP ports IP precedence tags or IP 4 263 DSCP tags to class of service values PRIORITY COMMANDS Priority Commands Layer 2 Table 4 46 Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page switchport priority Sets a port priority for inc
22. s response time to management commands issued through the web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 3 130 NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTEREACE Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics The default user name and password for the administrator is admin Home Page When your web browser connects with the switch s web agent the home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics LinkUp Link Down SMC Networks SMC8648T Manager System Name Object ID 136141222037 Location Contact System Up Time D days O hours 3 minutes and 14 0 seconds Connect to textual user interface Send mail to technical support TF connect to SMC Web Page ony for Ft Figure 3 1 Homepage 3 3 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuration Options Panel Display 3 4 Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply or Apply Changes button to confirm the new setting The following table s
23. 0 5 B 07 6 o 7 P 07 Figure 3 71 Configuring Ports and Trunks for Class of Service CLI The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config queue cos map 0 0 3 260 Console config queue cos map 1 1 Console config queue cos map 2 2 Console config exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 3 262 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 01234567 Priority Queue 01234567 Information of Eth 1 2 Traffic Class 01234567 4567 Priority Queue 0 1 2 3 Note Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 166 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Selecting the Queue Mode You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Command Attributes WRR Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using sch
24. 7 A ALIAS POINTER TO 6 71964 www msn com tw 6 f4 CNAME 65 54 131 192 605 passportimages com 9 f4 ALIAS POINTER TO 8 605 www passportimages com 10 4 CNAME 165 193 72 190 87 global msads net x Figure 3 87 Displaying the DNS Cache CLI This example displays all the resource records learned from the designated name servers Console show dns cache 3 165 3 196 NO FLAG TYPE 0 4 CNAME www microsoft akadns net 1 4 CNAME www microsoft akadns net 2 4 CNAME www microsoft akadns net 3 4 CNAME www microsoft akadns net 4 4 CNAME www microsoft akadns net 5 4 ALIAS 6 4 CNAME 7 4 ALIAS 8 4 CNAME 9 4 ALIAS www passportimages com 10 4 CNAME Console IP 207 46 134 222 207 46 134 190 207 46 134 155 207 46 249 222 207 46 249 27 POINTER TO 4 207 46 68 27 POINTER TO 6 65 54 131 192 POINTER TO 8 165 193 72 190 TTL 51 51 S 51 51 51 71964 71964 605 605 87 DOMAIN www microsoft com msn com tw www msn com tw passportimages com global msads net CHAPTER 4 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interfa
25. By default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select 1 RADIUS 2 TACACS and 3 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted using the TACACS server and finally the local user name and password is checked 3 35 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 36 Command Attributes Authentication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only TACACS User authentication is performed using a TACACS server only authentication sequence User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the indicated
26. Enables or disables the specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list 3 149 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New 1 DefaultVian Enabled VLAN ID 1 4094 2 VLAN Name R amp D lt lt Add Remove Status M Enable z Figure 3 62 Creating Virtual LANs CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database 3 232 Console config vlan vlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active 3 233 Console config vlan end Console show vlan 3 242 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups 1 Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Eth1 7 Eth1 8 Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Eth1 15 Eth1 16 Eth1 17 Eth1 18 Eth1 19 Eth1 20 Eth1 21 Eth1 22 Eth1 23 Eth1 24 2 Static RED Active Console config vlan 3 150 VLAN CONFIGURATION Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connecte
27. Ifingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port Ifingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STP However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP GVRP Status Enables disables GVRP for the interface GVRP must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect See Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 16 When disabled any GVRP packets received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other ports Default Disabled 3 155 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 156 GARP Join Timer The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate ina VLAN group Range 20 1000 centiseconds Default 20 GARP Leave Timer The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range 60 3000 centiseconds Default 60 GARP LeaveAll Timer The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message f
28. Mirror Port Configuration Mirror Sessions New Source 1 10 Both Destination 1 13 PTEE Source Port 1 al Remove La E E 1 Target Port Figure 3 45 Configuring a Mirror Port CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port Note that default mirroring under the CLI is for both received and transmitted packets Console config interface ethernet 1 10 3 168 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 13 3 183 Console config 1f Configuring Rate Limits This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic coming out of the switch Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes 3 104 Port CONFIGURATION Command Attribute Rate Limit Sets the output rate limit for an interface Default Status Disabled Default Rate 1000 Mbps Range 1 1000 Mbps Web Click Rate Limit Input Output Port Trunk Configuration Set t
29. PRIORITY COMMANDS Example The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally Console config map ip precedence Console config map ip precedence Interface Configuration This command sets IP precedence priority 1 e IP Type of Service priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip precedence p precedence value cos cos value no map ip precedence precedence value 3 bit precedence value Range 0 7 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The list below shows the default priority mapping IP Precedence Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CoS Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a one to one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues e This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces 4 266 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 Console config if map ip dscp Global Configuration
30. Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mode is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static addresses have the following characteristics e Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down e Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table lt A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS Example Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset clear mac address table dynamic This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear mac address table dynamic show mac address ta
31. Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254 15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206 51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839 71752646358058176716709574804776117 Import Clients Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command page 4 86 to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3 33 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921 143173880 05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199696317 81366277414168985132049 11720483033925432410163799759237 144901 1938006090253948 40848271781943722884025331159
32. Resetting the System Pee EE cece ce eee eee 3 26 Setting the System Clock 1 0 0 cece cece eee eee 3 27 Configuring SN TP ostra oie ae a 3 27 Setting the Time Zone Urara aia eee eee eae 3 29 Simple Network Management Protocol 00000 e eee ee 3 30 Setting Community Access Strings s sssr srren renn 3 30 Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 3 31 User Authentication ecos ais ds 3 33 Configuring the Logon Password ocoooooocccocooooo 3 33 Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 3 34 Contiouring HTTP ca nl ra ety 3 38 Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate 3 40 Configuring the Secure Shell ooooommmo oooooo 3 41 Generating the Host Key Pair oooooommmo ooo 3 43 Configuring the SSH Server 0 6 06 cece eee 3 46 Configuring Port Security 6 6 3 48 Configuring 802 1x Port Authentication 04 3 51 Displaying 802 1x Global Settings ooooo o 3 52 Configuring 802 1x Global Settings 3 55 Configuring Port Authorization Mode 3 56 Displaying 802 1x Statistics 2 0 cece eee eee 3 58 Access Control Lasts its had Saal sid Gos hy heels ears Res 3 60 Configuring Access Control Lists ooooommoc m ooo o o 3 60 Setting the ACL Name and Type ooo oooooooccccoo 3 61 Configuring a Standard IP ACL 0 000 3 63 Configuring an Extended IP ACL
33. This command enables IP DSCP mapping e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping Syntax no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config map ip dscp Console config 4 267 PRIORITY COMMANDS map ip dscp Interface Configuration This command sets IP DSCP priority i e Differentiated Services Code Point priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp dscp value cos cos value no map ip dscp dscp value 8 bit DSCP value Range 0 255 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 0 8 1 10 12 14 16 2 18 20 22 24 3 26 28 30 32 34 36 4 38 40 42 5 48 6 46 56 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP
34. Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured Spanning Tree Enables disables STA on this interface Default Enabled Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority 1 e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 3 131 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 132 Path Cost This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit
35. congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage This switch provides four priority queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission 3 163 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 164 Command Attributes Default Priority The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0 Number of Egress Traffic Classes The num
36. dot1x timeout Sets the time that a switch port waits GC 4 109 quiet period after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout Sets the time period after which a GC 4 110 re authperiod connected client must be re authenticated dot1x timeout tx period Sets the time period during an GC 4 110 authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packe show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4 111 authentication dotlx default This command sets the default authentication server type Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication dotix default radius no authentication dotlx Default Setting RADIUS Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config authentication dot1x default radius Console config 4 105 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dot1x default This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values Syntax dotlx default Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tdot1x default Console config dotlx max req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dotlx max req count no dotlx max req count The maximum number
37. e If there is no domain list the domain name specified with the ip domain name command is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used Example This example adds two domain names to the current list and then displays the list Domain Name Name Server Console sample sample Console config H tip domain list sample com jp Console config H tip domain list sample com uk Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com List com jp com uk List Related Commands ip domain name 4 159 4 161 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip name server This command specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Use the no form to remove a name server from this list Syntax no ip name server server address1 server address2 server address6 e server address1 IP address of domain name server e server address2 server address6 IP address of additional domain name servers Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The listed name servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response Example This example adds two domain name servers to the list and then displays the list Console config ip name server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Co
38. followed by settings for each port Spanning tree mode Instance Vlans configuration Priority Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Transmission limit Path Cost Method Admin status Role State External path cost Internal path cost Priority Designated cost Designated port Designated root Designated bridge Fast forwarding Forward transitions Admin edge port Oper edge port Admin Link type Oper Link type Spanning Tree Status Console show spanning tree mst 2 Spanning tree information Spanning tree enable disable 2 4 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 2 sec 5 Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec 15 sec enable disable discarding 10000 10000 128 0 128 7 4096 2 0000E9313131 4096 2 0000E9313131 enable 0 enable enable auto point to point enable 3 136 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This example sets the priority for MSTI 1 and adds VLANs 1 5 to this MSTI Console config spanning tree mst configuration 3 213 Console config mst imst 1 priority 4096 3 215 Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 1 5 3 214 Console config mst Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current status
39. map access list ip 4 130 4 132 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS match access list ip This command changes the IEEE 802 1p priority IP Precedence or DSCP Priority of a frame matching the defined ACL rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking Use the no form to remove the ACL marker Syntax match access list ip ac _name set priority priority set tos tos_value set dscp dscp_value no match access list ip ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority tos_value IP Precedence value Range 0 7 e dscp_value Differentiated Services Code Point value Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities based on an ACL rule Traffic priorities may be included in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag This tag is also incorporated as part of the overall IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag To specify this priority use the set priority keywords The IP frame header also includes priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet The Type of Service octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service To specify the IP precedence priority use the set tos keywords To specify the DSCP priority use
40. no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections Example To set the password threshold to five attempts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line 4 19 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands silent time 4 20 silent time 4 20 This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration Example To set the silent time to 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Comman
41. oda Bo A Rios hentia Rate dl 4 289 Software Specifications ccc cece eee A 1 Software Features ssc Gian iceland ene nik Sie ahah aia A 1 Management Features led be he aed Be AL SS since A 3 Standards ii a Ao ees ae A 3 Management Information Bases 0 6 0 6 cece cece eee eee A 4 Troubleshooting si A eee Xo Ree ed ee B 1 Glossary Index XV Table l t Key Featutes csc ced cece seco bates erica peered 6 1 1 Table 1 2 System Defaults 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee 1 7 Table 3 1 Configuration Options 0 00 eee eee eee eee 3 4 Table 3 25 Main Med Gabi eh gana we eae bl wt Face Hoel aves 3 5 Table 3 3 HTTPS Suppott 0 08 g rocs ees oe ee ae pes oe eee bee ees 3 39 Table 34 802 0 Statistics seat toga o sb antes eae areola 3 58 Table 3 5 LACP Port Counter Information 00 3 94 Table 3 6 LACP Settings siii ee Penis Pe ee Ae ads 3 96 Table 3 7 LACP Remote Side Settings ooooooooccomooo 3 99 Table 3 8 Pott Statisties sais as iio a 3 106 Table 3 9 Egress Queue Priority Mapping oooooococoooo 3 165 Table 3 10 CoS Priority Levels 0 0 ee eee eee 3 165 Table 3 11 IP Precedence Priotuty 0 00 0 3 171 Table 3 12 Mapping DSCP Priority 0 000 3 173 Table 3 13 CoS to ACL Mapping 0 0 0 0 0 cc ee ee eee ee 3 177 Table 4 1 Command Modes 0 0 0 c cece cee eee eee 4 8 Table 4 2 Configuration Commands 0 000 0 e eee 4 10 Ta
42. out e in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs 4 123 COMMAND LINE INTEREACE Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified IP ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Example Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl Related Commands mask IP ACL 4 125 ip access group 4 129 4 124 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS mask IP ACL This command defines a mask for IP ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Use the no form to remove a mask Syntax no mask protocol any host source bitmask any host destination bitmask precedence tos dscp source port port bitmask destination port port bitmask control flag lag bitmask e protocol Check the protocol field e any Any address will be matched e host The address must be for a host device not a subnetwork source bitmask So
43. provides the CLI and Web management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 3 22 for more information e Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also known as POST Power On Self Test Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files However you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded MANAGING SYSTEM FILES Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file 2 13 INITLAL CONFIGURATION 2 14 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP Web agent Using a Web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity The Web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard Web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface CLI to manage the switch ov
44. recognized certification authority Caution For maximum security we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased When you have obtained these place them on your TFTP server and use the following command at the switch s command line interface to replace the default unrecognized certificate with an authorized one Console copy tftp https certificate 3 86 TFTP server ip address lt server ip address gt Source certificate file name lt certificate file name gt Source private file name lt private key file name gt Private password lt password for private key gt Note The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated To reset the switch type Console reload USER AUTHENTICATION Configuring the Secure Shell The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as r ogin remote login rsh remote shell and re remote copy ate not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Te
45. replace an older product in its product line with one that incorporates these newer technologies At that point the obsolete product is discontinued and is no longer an Active SMC product A list of discontinued products with their respective dates of discontinuance can be found at http www smc com index cfm action customer_service_warranty All products that are replaced become the property of SMC Replacement products may be either new or reconditioned Any replaced or repaired product carries either a 30 day limited warranty or the remainder of the initial warranty whichever is longer SMC is not responsible for any custom software or firmware configuration information or memory data of Customer contained in stored on or integrated with any products returned to SMC pursuant to any warranty Products returned to SMC should have any customer installed accessory or add on components such as expansion modules removed prior to returning the product for replacement SMC is not responsible for these items if they are returned with the product Customers must contact SMC for a Return Material Authorization number prior to returning any product to SMC Proof of purchase may be required Any product returned to SMC without a valid Return Material Authorization RMA number clearly marked on the outside of the package will be returned to customer at customer s expense For warranty claims within North America please call our toll free custo
46. show vlan id v an id name v an name id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters Default Setting Shows all VLANSs Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 242 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups a Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Ethl 7 Eth1 8 Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Eth1 15 Eth1 16 Eth1 17 Eth1 18 Eth1 19 Eth1 20 Eth1 21 Eth1 22 Eth1 23 Eth1 24 Console Configuring Protocol based VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type in use by the inboun
47. 00 80 enable 80 enable 443 4 82 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The session used to execute this command is indicated by a symbol next to the Line i e session index number Example Console show users Username accounts Username Privilege Public Key admin 15 None guest 0 None Online users Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 00 00 1 vty 0 admin 0 04 37 10 1 0 19 Console show version This command displays hardware and software version information for the system Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 83 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 3 14 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command Example Console show version Unitl Serial number Hardware version Number of ports 48 Main power status Up Redundant power status not present Agent master Unit id sa Loader version 1 0 0 1 Boot rom version 1 0 0 1 Operation code version 1 1 0 4 Console Frame Size Commands Table 4 18 Frame Size Commands Command Function Mode Page jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC 4 84
48. 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must be using IGMP v2 for this command to take effect This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group 4 280 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 275 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 280 ip igmp snooping router port expire time This command configures the query timeout Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port 1 e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect Example Th
49. 13 config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member Non Member VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member Web Open VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Membership Select an interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN ID and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply 3 153 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH VLAN Static Membership by Port Interface Pon 3 C Trunk Query Member Non Member Vian 1 Figure 3 64 Assigning VLAN Port and Trunk Groups CLI This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 3 168 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 3 240 Console config if switchport allowed vlan remove 2 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3 154 You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types ingress filterin
50. 3 161 Class of Service Configuration 2 0 6 c eee eee eee 3 163 Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces ooo o 3 163 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues o ooo oooomo o o 3 165 Selecting the Queue Mode 0 00 c eee eee eee 3 167 Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes 3 168 Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values 3 169 Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority o ooo ooo o 3 170 Mapping IP Precedence 0 cece cece eee 3 171 Mapping DSCP Priority 0 6 eee eee ee 3 173 Mapping IP Port Priority 6 eee eee eee 3 175 Mapping CoS Values to ACLs 0 0 6 0 eee eee eee 3 177 Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules 3 178 Multicast Filter a adi vi 3 181 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 0oooocccococomo 3 182 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters 3 182 Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3 185 Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router 3 186 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3 187 Assigning Ports to Multicast Services o o ooooo o 3 188 Configuring Domain Name Service 2 0 0 6 cece eee 3 190 Configuring General DNS Server Parameters 3 190 Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries 3 193 Displaying the DNS Cache 0 eee eee 3 195 Command Line Interface ooooooooooo oo 4 1 Using the Command Line Interface ooo
51. 4 Setting Passwords siii a a 2 5 Setting an IP Address doia ao i a E EE REAA 2 6 Manual Configuration 0 0 eee eee 2 6 Dynamic Configuration 0 00 cee eee eee 2 7 Enabling SNMP Management Access 00000000000 2 9 Community Strings y 20 ess ate ke Sak Aa eho hi a ee 2 9 Trap RECEIVES eo aa tb 2 11 Saving Configuration Settings 0 eee cece eee ee 2 11 Managing System Files 0 nanunua nurnaru cece eee 2 12 Configuring the Switch ooooooooooo o o 3 1 Using the Web Interface cies ccs ete eases tee ers rarus 3 1 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 00 cee eee ooo 3 3 Home Page cit o i ee ee 3 3 Configuration Options 6 6 66 eee eee 3 4 Panel Display 2 3 wre ner les ak tek Seed Set wrens Bey Led 3 4 Main Menu dai tas a es els 3 5 Basic Configuration co bie de Se ote 3 12 Displaying System Information 0000 eee ee eee 3 12 Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions 3 14 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities o ooo o o o o 3 16 iti CONTENTS Setting the Switch s IP Address 0 0 ee eee eee eee 3 17 Manual Configuration 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 19 Using DHCP BOOTP rentin nik eee 3 20 Managing Firmware 6 eee eee 3 22 Downloading System Software from a Server 3 22 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3 24 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Servet 3 25
52. A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP A standard host to host mail transport protocol that operates over TCP port 25 Glossary 6 GLOSSARY Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management setvices Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Protocol STP A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TPACACS TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS compliant devices on the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the pr
53. Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use the show spanning tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree CST and for every interface in the tree Use the show spanning tree nterface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree CST Use the show spanning tree mst nstance_ d command to display the spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree MST e Fora description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 4 121 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 4 126 4 228 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Designated Root Current root port Designated root Designated bridge Console Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Instance 0 Vlans configuration 1 4094 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 215 Max hops 220 Remaining hops 20 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 200000 Current root cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec 22 Transmission limit 3 Pat
54. Configuration PORT CONFIGURATION CLI This example creates trunk 2 with ports 1 and 2 Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config Htinterface port channel 2 3 168 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config if channel group 1 3 189 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 3 178 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 00 E8 AA AA 01 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Flow control Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Created by User Link status Down Operation speed duplex 1000ful1l Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Console Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Command Usage To avoid creating a loop in the dynamically network be sure you enable LACP enabled before connecting the ports and also TEPPI disconnect the ports before disabling active backup LACP links L D iink e If the target switch has also enabled ad ale a al a LACP on the connected ports the x configured trunk will be activated automatically me
55. Console config ip mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A2 in Console config if end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console This shows how to create an extended ACL with an egress mask to drop packets leaving network 171 69 198 0 when the Layer 4 source port is 23 Console config access list ip extended A3 Console config ext acl deny host 171 69 198 5 any Console config ext acl deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny host 171 69 198 5 any deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config Console config access list ip mask precedence out Console config ip mask acl imask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console config ip mask acl exit Console config tinterface ethernet 1 15 Console config if H tip access group A3 out Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 deny host 171 69 198 5 any IP egress mask ACL mask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console 4 127 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This is a more comprehensive example It denies any TCP packets in which the SYN bit is ON and permits all other packets It then sets the ingress mask to check the deny rule first and finally binds
56. Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access 1 e Telnet Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as Vty in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters e g databits do not affect Telnet connections Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config line console Console config line 4 15 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE login 4 16 Related Commands show line 4 25 show users 4 83 This command enables password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command i e default setting When using this method the managemen
57. Count 2 Figure 3 23 802 1x Information 3 53 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 54 CLI This example shows the default protocol settings for 802 1x For a description of the additional entries displayed in the CLI See show dot1x on page 4 111 Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parame reauth enabled yes reauth period 300 quiet period 350 tx period 300 supp timeout 30 server timeout 30 reauth max 2 max req 2 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status 1 1 disabled 1 2 disabled 1 23 disabled 1 24 enabled 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled o Status Operation mode Max count Port control Supplicant Current Identifier Authenticator State State Reauth Count State Request Count Identifier Server Reauthentication Sta State Console ters Operation Mode Single Host Single Host Single Host Single Host m port 1 802 1X is enabled on port 24 Unauthorized Single Host 5 Auto 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 Machine Connecting 3 Backend State Machine Idle 0 0 te Machine Initialize Mode ForceAuthorized ForceAuthorized ForceAuthorized Auto 3 111 Authorized n a n a yes yes USER AUTHENTICATION Configuring 802 1x Global Settings The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication process that runs between the client and the switch 1 e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process
58. DSCP Priority IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 Nl olala olni elo Command Attributes e DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces 3 173 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority DSCP 1 CoS 0 DSCP2 CoS 0 DSCP Priority Table DSCP 3 CoS 0 DSCP 4 CoS 0 DSCP5 CoS 0 DSCP6 CoS0 y Class of Serice Value 0 7 1 Restore Default Figure 3 76 Mapping IP DSCP Priority to Class of Service Values CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 1 and then displays the DSCP Priority settings Console config map ip dscp 3 267 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 3 268 Console config if end Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 3 271 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 o o Eth 1 1 1 o0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Note Mapping specific values
59. Filtering Commands Command Groups Function Page IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping 4 272 or static assignment sets the IGMP version displays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for 4 277 multicast filtering at Layer 2 Static Multicast Configures static multicast router ports 4 282 Routing IGMP Snooping Commands Table 4 49 IGMP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4 273 ip igmp snooping vlan Adds an interface as a member of a GC 4 274 static multicast group ip igmp snooping Configures the IGMP version for GC 4 275 version snooping 4 272 COMMAND LINE INTEREACE Table 4 49 IGMP Snooping Commands multicast Command Function Mode Page show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query PE 4 276 configuration show Shows the IGMP snooping MAC PE 4 276 mac address table multicast list ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form 4 273 to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config tip igmp snooping Console config MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snoopin
60. HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure 3 38 access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Command Usa ge Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connec tion The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data USER AUTHENTICATION The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above and Netscape Navigator 4 x or above The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 3 3 HTTPS Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 4 76 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify
61. IP Precedence Priority Table Figure 3 75 Mapping IP Precedence to Class of Service Values CLI The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 on port 1 and then displays the IP Precedence settings Console config map ip precedence 3 265 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 3 266 Console config if end Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 1 3 270 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 2 Eth 1 1 3 3 Eth 1 1 4 4 Eth 1 1 5 5 Eth 1 1 6 6 Eth 1 1 7 7 Console Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 172 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP replaces the ToS bits but it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant ToS enabled devices will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 3 12 Mapping
62. IP address es to the Web group e snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group e startaddress A single IP address or the starting address of a range end address The end address of a range Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage 4 38 If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP Web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP Web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS e You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses e You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses Console config management all client 192 168 1 19 Console config management all cl
63. Information Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 5 LACP Port Counter Information Field Description Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Unknown Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Pkts Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Web Click Port LACP Port Counters Information Select a member port to display the corresponding information LACP Port Counters Information Member Port Trunk ID LACPDUs Sent LACPDUs Receive Marker Sent Marker Receive Marker Unknown Pkts Marker Illegal Pkts Figure 3 41 Displaying LACP Port Counters Information 3 95 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI The following example displays LACP counters for port channel 1 Console show 1 lacp counters 3 196 Channel group 1 LACPDUs Sent 21 LACPDU
64. Port1 Interface Por y VLANID fiz lt lt Add hal A Multicast IP emove Port 1 y Trunk d Figure 3 84 Specifying Multicast Port Membership 3 189 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 1 1 12 ethernet 1 12 3 274 Console config exit Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 3 276 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console Configuring Domain Name Service The Domain Naming System DNS service on this switch allows host names to be mapped to IP addresses using static table entries or by redirection to other name servers on the network When a client device designates this switch as a DNS server the client will attempt to resolve host names into IP addresses by forwarding DNS queries to the switch and waiting for a response You can manually configure entries in the DNS table used for mapping domain names to IP addresses configure default domain names or specify one or more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Configuring General DNS Server Parameters 3 190 Command Usage To enable DNS service on this switch first configure one or more name servers and then enable domain lookup status e To append domain names to incomplete h
65. Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the switch In this case you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface You can only restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current address is still available CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart 3 286 Console 3 21 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Managing Firmware 3 22 You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version Note Runtime code can also be upgraded by using Batch Upgrade Batch Upgrade can discover switches on local or other networks After discovering the switches Batch Upgrade can then be set to automatically upgrade the runtime code on all discovered switches Batch Upgrade is provided in the Batch Upgrade folder in the CD provided with this switch For details see the Batch Upgrade document in this Batch Upgrade folder Command Attributes TFTP Serve
66. Status Max MAC Count 0 20 Trunk 1 none y F Enable foe y F Enable none y I Enable ome y I Enable Trap and Shutdown M Enable none y F Enable ome y F Enable fome y I Enable Figure 3 22 Configuring Port Security TTT Ol ny oi nal Ss win CLI This example sets the command mode to Port 5 sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port and then enables port security for the switch config interface ethernet 1 5 config if port security action trap and shutdown 3 102 config if port security config if Console Console Console Console 3 50 USER AUTHENTICATION Configuring 802 1x Port Authentication Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1x dot1x standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network This switch uses the Extensible Authentication P
67. ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The default IP Precedence values are mapped one to one to Class of Service values i e Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0 and so forth Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control and the other bits for various application types ToS bits are defined in the following table Table 3 11 IP Precedence Prioruty Priority Level Traffic Type Priority Level Traffic Type 7 Network Control Flash 6 Internetwork Control 2 Immediate Critical 1 Priority 4 Flash Override 0 Routine Command Attributes IP Precedence Priority Table Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority 3 171 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority IP Precedence Priority Select an entry from the IP Precedence Priority Table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field and then click Apply IP Precedence Priority IP Precedence 0 CoS a IP Precedence 1 CoS IP Precedence 2 des 2 IP Precedence 3 CoS 3 IP Precedence 4 CoS 4 IP Precedence 5 CoS5 IP Precedence 6 CoS 6 IP Precedence 7 CoS 7 Class of Service Value 0 7 fo Restore Default
68. Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Displaying Current VLANs The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging Command Attributes Web VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Up Time at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry Egress Ports Shows all the VLAN port members Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members 3 147 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 148 Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Current Table Select any ID from the scroll down list VLAN Current Table VLAN 10 1 Up Time at Creation 0 dO hO min7 s Status Permanent Egress Ports Untagged Ports gt Figure 3 61 Displaying VLAN Information by Port Membership Command Attributes CLI VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes Type Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic Automatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status
69. Use the no form to remove the current domain name Syntax ip domain name name no ip domain name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None 4 159 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip domain name sample com Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain list 4 160 ip name server 4 162 ip domain lookup 4 163 ip domain list This command defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names i e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove a name from this list Syntax no ip domain list name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 160 Command Usage DNS COMMANDS Domain names are added to the end of the list one at a time When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS server on this switch it will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match
70. admin 250 cipher 3des session started Console disconnect 0 3 24 Console Configuring Port Security 3 48 Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that ate authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message To use port security first allow the switch to dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on a port for an initial training period and then enable port security to stop address learning Be sure you enable the learning function long enough to ensure that all valid VLAN members have been registered on the selected port Note that you can also restrict the maximum number of addresses that can be learned by a port USER AUTHENTICATION To add new VLAN members at a later time you can manually add secure addresses with the Static Address Table page 3 112 or turn off port security to reenable the learning function long enough for new VLAN members to be r
71. amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config ext acl ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Related Commands access list ip 4 118 show ip access list This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs Syntax show ip access list standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies a standard IP ACL extended Specifies an extended IP ACL acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access list standard IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 119 ip access group 4 129 access list ip mask precedence This command accesses the IP Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in
72. are displayed If the user keyword is entered but no user name is specified then the public keys for all users ate displayed e When an RSA key is displayed the first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 35 and the last string is the encoded modulus When a DSA key is displayed the first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS and the last string is the encoded modulus Example Console show public key host Host RSA 1024 35 156849954018676692593339467750546173253136748908365472541502024559319986854435 836165199992332978176606583095861082591321289023376546801726272571413428762941 301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194174677298486546861571773939016477 935594230357741309802273708779454524083971752646358058176716709574804776117 DSA ssh dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV yrDbKSt I1nzD Dg0h2Hxc YV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUW a4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3VRRSy1N2XFfAKx15fwFfv J1PAOKFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0OZ4mUZpE85PWxDZMaCNBPjBrRAAAAFOChb4vsdfQGNIjwbvwrN LaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRj 5kh47wY4i8cZvH p9cnrfwFTMU01VFD1y3IR 2G3 95NLy50d7ZDxfA9mCOLT yyEfbobMJZi 80GCst SNOxrZZVnMqWwrTYfdrKX7YKBw Kjw6Bm iFq70 jAhf1Dg4510Ac27s6TLdtnylwRq ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOy DbsloBfPuSAb4oAsyj KXKVYNLOkTLZ cFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2 o AVzX4Gg ygqdT1YmGA7fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6
73. assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands such as vlan on page 233 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN 4 245 VLAN COMMANDS e When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner If the frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface Example The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 2 Console config 1f show protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups Syntax show protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identifier for a protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Default Setting All protocol groups are displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 246 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet Console show protocol vlan protocol group ProtocolGroup ID Frame Type Protocol Type Console
74. be used to return the switch to SNTP client mode Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 02 52 44 2002 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast Console Related Commands sntp server 4 71 sntp poll 4 72 sntp broadcast client 4 74 show sntp 4 74 4 73 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE sntp broadcast client This command synchronizes the switch s clock based on time broadcast from time servers using the multicast address 224 0 1 1 Use the no form to disable SNTP broadcast client mode Syntax no sntp broadcast client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config Hsntp broadcast client Console show sntp 4 74 This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode and the current SNTP mode ie client or broadcast Example Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 05 13 28 2002 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast Console SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS clock timezone This command s
75. between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN However note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are sent untagged hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchport acceptable frame types 4 237 4 236 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport acceptable frame types This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable frame types e all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged tagged The port only receives tagged frames Default Setting All frame types Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames Consol
76. can also manually set the clock using the CLI See calendar set on page 4 76 If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup This switch acts as an SNTP client in two modes Unicast The switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Broadcast The switch sets its clock from a time server in the same subnet that broadcasts time updates If there is more than one SNTP server the switch accepts the first broadcast it detects and ignores broadcasts from other servers Configuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to specific time servers i e client mode update its clock based on broadcasts from time servers or use both methods When both methods are enabled the switch will update its clock using information broadcast from time servers but will query the specified server s if a broadcast is not received within the polling interval 3 27 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 28 Command Attributes SNTP Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client This mode requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field SNTP Broadcast Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP broadcast client This mod
77. configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Console exit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username This command exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program Example 4 31 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This example shows how to quit a CLI session Console quit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username System Management Commands 4 32 These commands ate used to control system logs passwords user names browser configuration options and display or configure a variety of other system information Table 4 7 System Mangement Commands Command Function Page Group Device Configures information that uniquely identifies this 4 33 Designation switch User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for 4 34 management access IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management 4 37 access Web Server Enables management access via a Web browser 4 40 Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4 45 Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4 58 SMTP Alerts Con
78. connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Default Autonegotiation enabled Advertised capabilities for 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full Forced Mode Shows the forced preferred port type to use for the combination ports 21 24 Coppet Forced Always uses the built in RJ 45 port Copper Preferred Auto Uses the built in RJ 45 port if both combination types are functioning and the RJ 45 port has a valid link SFP Forced Always uses the SFP port even if module is not installed SFP Preferred Auto Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To create trunks and select port members see Creating Trunk Groups on page 3 86 Note Auto negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed Duplex Mode or Flow Control options 3 85 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings and click Apply
79. dns DNS COMMANDS This command displays the configuration of the DNS server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 10 55 Console show dns cache This command displays entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL 0 4 CNAME 10 2 44 96 893 1 4 CNAME 10 2 44 3 898 2 4 CNAME 66 218 71 84 298 3 4 CNAME 66 218 71 83 298 4 4 CNAME 66 218 71 81 298 5 4 CNAME 66 218 71 80 298 6 4 CNAME 66 218 71 89 298 T 4 CNAME 66 218 71 86 298 8 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 7 298 Console DOMAIN pttch_pc accton com tw ahten accton com tw www yahoo akadns net www yahoo akadns net www yahoo akadns net www yahoo akadns net www yahoo akadns net www yahoo akadns net www yahoo com 4 165 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Field Description NO The entry number for each resource record FLAG The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable TYPE This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry IP The IP address associated with this record TIL The time to live reported by the name server DOMAI
80. en inte ee Diente SS 4 111 Access Control List Commands 0 000000 serren cece 4 114 ILEACIS aci do Bess tug anes Nad de E folate old 4 116 access list Ip 2 Lack a Be intend A id 4 118 permit deny Standard ACL 0 0 0 0 000 4 119 permit deny Extended ACL 0 00008 4 120 show ip access list 6 cece 4 123 access list ip mask precedence 0 0 00 eee 4 123 mask PLACE ad LI AS SO i n 4 125 show access list ip mask precedence oooommm 4 128 IP ACCESS D U is LAG Ae a hee an as OR a hd 4 129 show ip access ZrOUP 2 eee eee 4 130 map access list 1p 6 eee eee ee 4 130 show map access list ip 6 eee eee 4 132 match access list ip 6 6 eee eee 4 133 SHOW Markina ins Sagi Due haya Dade ASS 4 134 CONTENTS MAGIACKS IEA ede io 4 135 access listac wit da a aac ha bol a ence a 4 136 permit deny MAC ACL 0 0 0 0 eee eee 4 137 show mac access list 2 6 eee eee eee 4 139 access list mac mask precedence 0000 4 139 mask MAC ACE Li wines tie oh a dd 4 140 show access list mac mask precedence 4 143 MAC ACCESS OTOUP iia heeded te ns la eS Gaa 4 144 show mac access gr0UpP 6 eee eee 4 145 map access list MaC naau unns eee eee eee 4 145 show map access list mac 6 eee eee 4 146 match access list Mac 6 eee eee 4 147 AGL Informations aa dat a 4 148 show access list 6 a enia a na e Aa aa ARES A S 4 148 SHOW ACCESS SFOUP sisis
81. filename filename Name of the configuration file or image name Default Setting None 4 89 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If the file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted e Factory_Default_Config cfg cannot be deleted Example This example shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memoty Console delete test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 4 90 delete public key 4 51 dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir boot rom config opcode fienamel The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file config Switch configuration file opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of the file or image If this file exists but contains errors information on this file cannot be shown Default Setting None 4 90 FLASH FILE COMMANDS Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If you enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files e File information is shown below Column Heading Description file name The name of the file file type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started size The length of the file in bytes Example The following example shows how to displa
82. filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 182 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group MULTICAST FILTERING Command Usage e Static multicast addresses are never aged out e When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command Attribute Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Port List New Static IGMP Member Port VLAN 1 224 1 1 12 Unit 1
83. for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 174 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Mapping IP Port Priority You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP port number i e TCP UDP port number in the frame header Some of the more common TCP service ports include HTTP 80 FTP 21 Telnet 23 and POP3 110 Command Attributes IP Port Priority Status Enables or disables the IP port priority Interface Selects the port or trunk interface to which the settings apply IP Port Priority Table Shows the IP port to CoS map IP Port Number TCP UDP Set a new IP port number Class of Service Value Sets a CoS value for a new IP port Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP Port Status Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled IP Port Priority Status lip Port Priority Global Status Enabled Figure 3 77 Globally Enabling the IP Port Priority Status 3 175 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Click Priority IP Port Priority Select a port or trunk from the Interface field Enter the port number for a network application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box and then click Add IP Port IP Port Priority IP Port Priority Tabl
84. form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex e 1000full Forces 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation Default Setting e Auto negotiation is enabled by default When auto negotiation is disabled the default speed duplex setting is 100half for 100BASE TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 169 INTEREACE COMMANDS Command Usage To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Example The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps half duplex operation Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if speed duplex 100half config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 170 capabilities 4 172 negotiation This command ena
85. group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN 3 141 CONFI 3 142 GURING THE SWITCH This switch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs e Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unawate devices e Priority tagging Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you mu
86. how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console copy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console The following example shows how to download a configuration file Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Source configuration file name startup 01 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console FLAsH FILE COMMANDS This example shows how to copy a secute site certificate from an TFTP server It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate Console copy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Source certificate file name SS certificate Source private file name SS private Private password x x x Success Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y This example shows how to copy a public key used by SSH from an TFTP server Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch Console copy tftp public key TFTP server IP address 192 168 1 19 Choose public key type 1 RSA 2 DSA lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name steve pub Username steve TFTP Download Success Write to FLASH Programming Success Console delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete
87. ii Alai 4 60 logging facility sib hae aun eas oki Ee OG 4 61 E aaetcletven da 4 62 Cleat lopoinigs a fo E hii ace ara elated 4 62 show logoina ida aaa 4 63 viii CONTENTS SMTP Alert Commands 000s 4 65 logging sendmail host 0 cece eee eee 4 66 logging sendmail level 0 eee eee eee 4 67 logging sendmail source email 6 0 0 0 0 0000 e eee 4 67 logging sendmail destination email 00 4 68 logging s ndiniall e ees bd cee koi 4 69 show logging sendmail 0 6c cece eee 4 69 Time Commands hat it Seed Slee Sas es ela a 4 70 SHtpSCLVEL id A Sat AA 4 71 Sip Polls dae AON etd adel St al bd SAM 4 72 satp cent it a ii 4 72 sntp broadcast client 6 eee eee 4 74 SHOW SHLPSSs ces e 4 74 clock timezone eh ada aes be 4 75 calendar Set acia ad A dd ae ie 4 76 show calendar nir saisan Eire Eos 4 76 System Status Commands 0 0c cee eee ee eee 4 77 show startup config 6 eee eee eee 4 77 show running config 6 6 eee eee 4 80 SHOW SYStEM 0 3 5 i gta sib a A assess ohne E 4 82 ShO Users 2 008 bat be As A a 4 83 SHOW versi tl Barner eae et Lia he Ee Aa 4 83 Frame Size Commands 0 00 eee eee eee eee 4 84 JUDO frame O AA ee eee ia 4 84 Flash File Commands eaa eee e cece ee ee eee eas 4 85 CODY a cl Saree oe det Mit od OM deat ee tee Oe deat Meet AY e 4 86 delta septic a Sate cia et dao 4 89 LAT eh EE E Sex ey tines Gua nar ats ROT
88. ingress port are also used at the egress port This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces 4 260 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console Console config interface ethernet 1 1 config if queue cos map 0 0 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 01234567 Priority Queue 01234567 Information of Eth 1 2 Traffic Class 01234567 34567 Priority Queue 0 1 2 Related Commands show queue cos map 4 262 show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console sh queue mode Wrr status Enabled Console 4 261 PRIORITY COMMANDS show queue bandwidth This command displays the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the eight priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue bandwidth Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight 0 ae 1 2 2 4 3 6 4 8 5 10 6 12 7 14 Console show queue cos map This command shows the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos map terface interface ethernet wit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe
89. is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch page 3 188 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures the multicast filters accordingly MULTICAST FILTERING e IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one routet switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the setvice requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicas
90. issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enable or disable GVRP and click Apply GVRP Status GVRP M Enable Figure 3 59 Enabling GVRP Status CLI This example enables GVRP for the switch Console config bridge ext gvrp 3 250 Console config Displaying Basic VLAN Information 3 146 The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes VLAN Version Number The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Only VLAN CONFIGURATION Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number 1 Maximum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Figure 3 60 Displaying Basic VLAN Information CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 3 251 Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable Yes
91. logging sendmail level level level One of the system message levels page 4 59 Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Default 7 Default Setting Level 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The specified level indicates an event threshold All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail level 3 Console config logging sendmail source email This command sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages Syntax logging sendmail source email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters 4 67 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail source email bill this company com Console config logging sendmail destination email This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages Use the no form to remove a recipient Syntax no
92. mask Syntax no mask pktformat any host source bitmask any host destination bitmask vid vid bitmask ethertype ebertype bitmask pktformat Check the packet format field If this keyword must be used in the mask the packet format must be specified in ACL tule to match any Any address will be matched e host The address must be for a single node e source bitmask The source address of the rule must match this bitmask e destination bitmask The destination address of the rule must match this bitmask e vid Check the VLAN ID field 4 140 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS vid bitmask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask ethertype Check the Ethernet type field ethertype bitmask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask Default Setting None Command Mode MAC Mask Command Usage e Up to seven masks can be assigned to an ingress or egress ACL e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered e First create the required ACLs and inbound or outbound masks before mapping an ACL to an interface 4 141 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 142 Example This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been chang
93. mode any 4 30 config mode exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or any 4 31 exits the CLI quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 4 31 help Shows how to use help any NA Shows options for command completion any NA context sensitive enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode additional commands are available and certain commands display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 8 Syntax enable ve level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode Default Setting Level 15 4 26 GENERAL COMMANDS Command Mode Normal Exec Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password see the enable password command on page 4 36 e The ff character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 4 27 enable password 4 36 disable This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privi
94. not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP For more information see Automatic VLAN Registration on page 3 144 None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN name and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply VLAN Static Table VLAN Name R amp D Status Y Enable Port Tagged Untagged Forbidden None Trunk Member AajU N mn G c c C c o C c c c G O c G c O la 3 152 Figure 3 63 Configuring VLAN Port Attributes VLAN CONFIGURATION CLI The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2 Console Console Console Console Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 3 240 config if exit config interface ethernet 1 2 config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged config if exit config interface ethernet 1
95. not written to the packet itself Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping Syntax no map access list ip ac _name cos cos value acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters cos value CoS value Range 0 7 4 130 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule e A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown in the following table For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues see queue cos map on 4 260 Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 25 Console config if map access list ip bill cos 0 Console config if Related Commands queue cos map 4 260 show map access list ip 4 132 4 131 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show map access list ip This command shows the CoS value mapped to an IP ACL for the current interface The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule Syntax show map access list ip n erface interface ethernet wnit port e unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map access list ip Access list to COS of Eth 1 24 Access list ALS1 cos 0 Console Related Commands
96. of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance Field Attributes MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 57 Default 0 Note The other attributes are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 126 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Information or Trunk Information Select the required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values MSTP Port Information MST Instance ID 0 gt Port STA Forward Designated Designated Designated Oper Oper Port Role Trunk Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Link Type Edge Port Member 1 Forwarding 1 200000 32768 0 0030F1552000 128 24 Jr Disabled Root 2 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000 9313131 128 2 Pants Enabled Disabled 3 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000E9313131 128 3 desa Enabled Disabled 4 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000 9313131 128 4 Pona Enabled Disabled 5 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000E9313131 128 5 Pamio Enabled Disabled oint zl Figure 3 57 Displaying MSTP Interface Settings 3 137 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This displays STA settings for instance 0 followed by settings for each port The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST page 3 117 the settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Instance Vlans configuration Priority Bridge Hello Tim
97. packet types Any Any Ethernet packet type Untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets Untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Command Usage Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or MAC If you select Host enter a specific address e g 11 22 33 44 55 66 If you select MAC enter a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as VID Ethernet type or packet format Then click Add MAC ACL Name a Action Source Source Destination Destination VID VID Ethernet Emerios Packet Remove MAC Mask MAC Mask Mask Type ask Format Action Permit y Source MAC Any y Source MAC Address Source MAC BitMask Destination MAC Host y Destination MAC Address 00 e0 29 94 34 de Destination BitMask ttt 00 00 00 00 00 00 VID VID Mask Ethernet Type 800 Ethernet Type Mask Packet Format Any y Aad Figure 3 30 Configuring MAC ACLs CLI This rule permits packets from any source MAC addres
98. port MONItOL ss pry an e P AE eee 4 184 Rate Limit Commands sesati t ae eens 4 185 fate Mt AA A A 4 186 Link Aggregation Commands 0 eee eee 4 187 channel orou ir et Gade hate ta 4 4 189 Maps fats A heeds Aha he E Sa eo 4 190 lacp system priority 0 eee eee 4 192 lacp admin key Ethernet Interface oooooooommm 4 193 lacp admin key Port Channel 00 000 eee eee 4 194 lacp POLE Priority pese a il ae eae ee 4 195 show lacp ates ii a ae a E 4 196 Address Table Commands 0 00 ccc eee 4 200 mac address table static 00 ns cee cee eee 4 201 clear mac address table dynamic 00000 4 202 show mac address table 2 0 cece cece eee 4 202 mac address table aging time 0 4 203 show mac address table aging time oooommoccocomoo 4 204 CONTENTS Spanning Tree Commands 6 6 6 eee eee 4 205 spanning tree tsa del tela id Mee oak eee atl 4 206 spanning tree mode wesc ce eeed eee sees bee ed 4 207 spanning tree forward time 1 1 0 4 209 spanning tree hello time 1 6 0 6 eee eee 4 210 Spanning tree Max age 6 eee 4 210 spanning tree priority 2 eee eee 4 211 spanning tree pathcost method 0 c cece eee 4 212 spanning tree transmission limit 0 00 ee eee 4 213 spanning tree mst configuration 1 66 6c ee eee ee eee 4 213 PSC Wan eice A id 4 214 Mist priority lt 2 c seis tees a 4 215 MAINE 624 nite Suds BEANS sue AE
99. ports dramatically increase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports up to 6 trunks Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted If broadcast traffic rises above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port IEEE 802 1D Bridge The switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this information The address table supports up to 16K addresses Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memory before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad frames fro
100. processed in the following manner Ifthe frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard tules applied to tagged frames Ifthe frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN Ifthe frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 WLAN ID VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Select a a port or trunk enter a protocol group ID the corresponding VLAN ID and click Apply Protocol Vlan Port Configuration Interface Porn 1 y C Trunk Query Current New lt lt Add Protocol Gruop ID 1 2147483647 Remove Vian ID 1 Group 1 Vlan 3 Figure 3 69 Mapping Protocols to VLANs CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION CLI The following maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 3 3 245 Console config 1f Class of Service Configuration Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to
101. same LAG e System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems e Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config 1f 4 192 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE lacp admin key Ethernet Interface This command configures a port s LACP administration key Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp actor partner admin key e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link key The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group LAG Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel admin key matches if configured Ifthe port channel admin key lacp adm
102. server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 EP 9 6 gt Note The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space BASIC CONFIGURATION Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click System File Configuration Enter the IP address of the TFTP server enter the name of the file to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name and then click Transfer from Server Transfer Configuration File from Server TFTP Server IP Address fio 1 0 19 Source File Name config il Destination File Name none y startup Transfer from Server zi Figure 3 10 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server If you download to a new file name then select the new file from the drop down box for Startup Configuration File and press Apply Changes To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu Start Up Configuration File File Name startup pa Apply Changes Figure 3 11 Selecting the Startup Configuration File
103. sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption e You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console configure Console config ip ssh server Console config Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 52 show ssh 4 55 ip ssh timeout Use this command to configure the timeout for the SSH server Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation Range 1 120 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase Once an SSH session has been established the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec timeout command for vty sessions Example Console config ip ssh timeout 60 Console config 4 49 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands exec timeout 4 18 show ip ssh 4 54 ip ssh authentication retries 4 50 Use this command to configure the number of times the SSH serv
104. specified NE PE 4 178 interface show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified NE PE 4 179 counters interfaces show interfaces Displays the administrative and NE PE 4 181 INTEREACE COMMANDS interface This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 e vlan vian id Range 1 4094 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify port 24 enter the following command Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description This command adds a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1 64 characters 4 168 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 24 Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no
105. starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config 4 209 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree hello time This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time me no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config spanning tree max age This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds 4 210 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets th
106. supports GVRP it will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and pass the message on to all other ports VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network This allows GVRP compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requests To implement GVRP in a network first add the host devices to the required VLANs using the operating system or other application software so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network For both the edge switches attached directly to these hosts and core switches in the network enable GVRP on the links between these devices You should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs Note If you have host devices that do not support GVRP you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices as described in Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 151 But you can still enable GVRP on these edge switches as well as on the core switches in the network VLAN CONFIGURATION ar a a a a a ES S Port based VLAN ale
107. that runs between the switch and authentication server The configuration options for parameters are described in this section Command Attributes 802 1x Re authentication Sets the client to be re authenticated after the interval specified by the Timeout for Re authentication Period Re authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port Default Disabled 802 1x Max Request Count Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 Timeout for Quiet Period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the dot1X Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds Timeout for Re authentication Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 seconds Timeout for TX Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds e authentication dot1x default Sets the default authentication server type Note that the specified authentication server type must be enabled and properly configured for dot1x to function properly Options radius CLI only 3 55 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 56 Web Selec
108. the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 trap destination IP address entries community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation Although you can set this string using the snmp host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the samp community command prior to using the snmp host command Maximum length 32 characters e version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps Default Setting Host Address None SNMP Version 1 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 152 SNMP CoMMANDS Command Usage Ifyou do not enter an snmp host command no notifications are sent In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp enable traps command Use the snmp enable traps command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one snmp enable traps command and the snmp host command for that host must be enabled e Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled The switch can send SNMP version 1 or version 2c notifications to a host IP address depending on the SNMP version t
109. the response to take when a security violation is detected shutdown trap trap and shutdown Combo forced mode Shows the forced preferred port type to use for combination ports 21 24 copper forced copper preferred auto SFP forced SFP preferred auto Current status Link Status Indicates if the link is up or down Operation speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Flow control type Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or none PORT CONFIGURATION CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 5 Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 3 178 Information of Eth 1 13 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 30 f1 47 58 46 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled Lacp Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Link status Down Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Console 3 83 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Interface Connections 3 84 You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed duplex mode and flow
110. the set dscp keywords Note that the IP frame header can include either the IP Precedence or DSCP priority type The precedence for priority mapping by this switch is IP Precedence or DSCP Priority and then 802 1p priority 4 133 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if match access list ip bill set dscp 0 Console config if Related Commands show marking 4 134 show marking This command displays the current configuration for packet marking Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show marking Interface ethernet 1 12 match access list IP bill set DSCP 0 match access list MAC a set priority 0 Console Related Commands match access list ip 4 133 4 134 MAC ACLs ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Table 4 28 MAC ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters GC 4 136 configuration mode permit deny Filters packets matching a specified MAC ACL 4 137 source and destination address packet format and Ethernet type show mac access list Displays the rules for configured PE 4 139 MAC ACLs access list mac Accesses the mode for configuring GC 4 139 mask precedence access control masks mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL MAC Mask 4 140 rules show access list mac Shows the ingress or egress rule PE 4 143 mask precedence masks for MAC ACLs mac acc
111. this command to change to Multiple Spanning Tree MST configuration mode Default Setting No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance The region name is set the switch s MAC address 4 213 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp Related Commands mst vlan 4 214 mst priority 4 215 name 4 216 revision 4 217 max hops 4 218 mst vlan This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance Use the no form to remove the specified VLANs Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all VLANs Syntax no mst nstance_id vlan vlan range instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 57 e vlan range Range of VLANs Range 1 4094 Default Setting none Command Mode MST Configuration 4 214 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node ina single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MSTI 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 58 instances Y
112. this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems Admin Key The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG Range 0 65535 Default 0 Port Priority If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Set Port Partner This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link i e the ports on the attached device The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor However configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Port CONFIGURATION Web Click Port LACP Aggregation Port Set the System Priority Admin Key and Port Priority for the Port Actor You can optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this device After you have completed setting the port LACP parame
113. vid 3 140 Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 3 168 Console config if mac access group M4 in 3 144 Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console Binding a Port to an Access Control List 3 76 After configuring the Access Control Lists ACL you can bind the ports that need to filter traffic to the appropriate ACLs You can only bind a port to one ACL for each basic type IP ingress IP egress MAC ingress and MAC egtess Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port e This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL ACCESS CONTROL LISTS When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail e The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for
114. when operating at full duplex Table 4 35 Link Aggregation Commands Command Function Mode Page Manual Configuration Commands interface port channel Configures a trunk and GC 4 168 enters interface configuration mode for the trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk IC Ethernet 4 189 Dynamic Configuration Command lacp Configures LACP for the IC Ethernet 4 190 current interface lacp system priority Configures a port s LACP IC Ethernet 4 192 system priority lacp admin key Configures a port s IC Ethernet 4 193 administration key lacp admin key Configures a port channel s IC Port Channel 4 194 administration key lacp port priority Configures a port s LACP IC Ethernet 4 195 port priority Trunk Status Display Command show interfaces status Shows trunk information NE PE 4 178 port channel show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4 196 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Guidelines for Creating Trunks General Guidelines Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have up to eight ports The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the por
115. will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset Example The following example clears statistics on port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Console 4 177 INTEREACE COMMANDS show interfaces status This command displays the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status i erface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 vlan v an id Range 1 4094 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 3 80 4 178 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 00 AB CD 00 01 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled Lacp Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Console show interfaces status vlan 1 Informa
116. 0000000 4 95 e 4 23 TACACS Client Commands 0000 4 99 e 4 24 Port Security Commands 0 000 000 4 102 e 4 25 802 1x Port Authentication Commands 4 104 e 4 26 Access Control List Commands 0 4 116 e 4 27 IP ACL Commands 0 0c eee eee eee 4 116 e 4 28 MAC ACL Commands 00 00 errre 4 135 e 4 29 ACL Information 1 0 0 0 eee cee eee 4 148 e 4 30 SNMP Commands 0 eee ee eee 4 149 e 4 31 DNS Commands 0 cece eee eee 4 157 e 4 32 Interface Commands 0 eee eee eee 4 167 e 4 33 Mirror Port Commands 0 00000 c eee eee 4 183 e 4 34 Rate Limit Commands 0 0 0 0 cee ee eee 4 185 e 4 35 Link Aggregation Commands 000 000 4 187 e 4 36 Adress Table Commands 0 000000 eee 4 200 e 4 37 Spanning Tree Commands 0 0000 erren 4 205 e 4 38 VLAN Commands 0 cece eee eee 4 231 e 4 39 Editing VLAN Groups 0 eee eee 4 231 e 4 40 Configuring VLAN Interfaces oooooocccoommmo 4 234 e 4 41 Displaying VLAN Information 000 4 242 e 4 42 Protocol based VLAN Commands 4 243 e 4 43 Private VLAN Commands 0 000 000 4 248 e 4 44 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4 250 e 4 45 Priority Commands 0 eee co 4 255 e 4 46 Priority Commands Layer 2 1 0 eee eee 4 256 e 4 47 Priority
117. 096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default 32768 VLANs in MST Instance VLANs assigned this instance e MST ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 57 Default 0 3 134 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION VLAN ID VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance Range 1 4094 The other global attributes are described under Displaying Global Settings page 3 121 The attributes displayed by the CLI for individual interfaces are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 126 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP VLAN Configuration Select an instance identifier from the list set the instance priority and click Apply To add the VLAN members to an MSTI instance enter the instance identifier the VLAN identifier and click Add MSTP Vlan Configuration MST Instance ID 2 y Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 4096 2 0000E9313131 Bridge ID 4096 0 0000E9313131 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 0 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d O h 4 min 14 s Priority 0 61440 4096 MSTP Vlan Configuration Vlan in MST Instance Vlan 2 Remove MST Id 0 57 Vlan Id Add Figure 3 56 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 3 135 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This displays STA settings for instance 1
118. 1 DSA ssh dss AAAAB3NzaC1lkc3MAAACBAN6 zwIqCqDb3 86 9j YVX1ME1SHLOECE Re 6hlasfEthIwmjhLY400j qJZpcEQUgC Ylum0Y2uoLka Py9ieGWO8f2gobUZKIICu Kg6vjO9XTs7XKcO5xfzkBiKviDa 20r1z6UK 6vFOgvUDFedlnixYTVo h5v8r0ea2r pnO6DkZAAAAFQCNZn x17dwpW8RrV DOnSWw4Qk 6QAAATEAptkGeB6B5hwagH4g UOCY611TmrmSiJgfwO090qRPUMPCAKCC uzxatO0o7drnlIZypMx Sx5RUdMGgKS 9ywsa 1cWqHeFY5i1c31DCNBueeLykZzVS RS azTKIK zrJh8GLG Ngq375R55yRxFvmcGlIn Q7IphPqyJ309MK8LFD mMJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP20FQX7VGOEbzZVDSOI RTMFy 3iUXtvGyQAOVSy6 7Mf c3 1MtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NxgilCg5z7VqbmRm2 8mWc5a f8TUAg PNWKV6WOhqmshQdotVzDR1e XKNTZj OuTwWEjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrbl DMdAfjnte8MZZs Console Configuring the SSH Server The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication Field Attributes SSH Server Status Allows you to enable disable the SSH server on the switch Default Enabled e Version The Secure Shell version number Version 2 0 is displayed but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1 5 or 2 0 clients SSH Authentication Timeout Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt Range 1 to 120 seconds Default 120 seconds USER AUTHENTICATION SSH Authentication Retries Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process Range 1 5 times
119. 1 0 1 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 Note The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default To access the switch through a Telnet session you must first set the IP address for the switch and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet For example Console Console Console Console config interface vlan 1 config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 config if exit config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE After you configure the switch with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 At the prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty 0 prompt for the administrator to show that you ate using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Vty 0 gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode i e Normal Exec 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the qui
120. 1000M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console PORT CONFIGURATION Configuring Port Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time TAA saa AE E E L E R analysis You can then attach a logic Sin analyzer or RMON probe to the target ART Te port and study the traffic crossing the port source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Command Usage e Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port Command Attributes Mirror Sessions Displays a list of current mirror sessions e Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored e Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive Tx transmit or Both Target Port The port that will duplicate or mirror the traffic on the soutce port 3 103 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port Mirror Port Configuration Specify the source port the traffic type to be mirrored and the monitor port then click Add
121. 2768 32768 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID Partner Admin Port Number LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol par tner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS Console show lacp 1 sysid Channel group System Priority System MAC Address 1 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 2 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 3 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 4 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 5 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 6 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2
122. 3 194 CONFIGURING DoMAIN NAME SERVICE Console config ip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 3 158 Console config ip host rd6 10 1 0 55 Console show host 3 164 Hostname rd5 Inet address 10 10 55 192 168 1255 Alias 1 rd6 Displaying the DNS Cache You can display entries in the DNS cache that have been learned v a the designated name servers Field Attributes e No The entry number for each resource record e Flag The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable e Type This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or ptimary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry e IP The IP address associated with this record e TTL The time to live reported by the name server Domain The domain name associated with this record 3 195 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Select DNS Cache Cache No Flag Type IP TIL Domain o f CNAME 207 46 134 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 1 4 CNAME 207 46 134 190 51 www microsoft akadns net 2 4 CNAME 207 465 134 155 51 www microsoft akadns net 3 f CNAME 207 46 249 222 51 hwww microsoft akadns net 4 4 CNAME 207 46 249 27 51 www microsoft akadns net 5 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 4 51 ww microsoft com 6 f4 CNAME 207 46 68 27 71964 msn com tw
123. 4 Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC addtess or Ethernet type To filter packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit tules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny tules the packet is accepted There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode STD ACL filters packets based on the source IP address e Extended IP ACL mode EXT ACL filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC ACL mode MAC ACL filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS The following restrictions apply to ACLs This s
124. 4 119 soutce ot destination IP address 4 116 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Table 4 27 IP ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page permit deny Filters packets meeting the specified EXT ACL 4 120 criteria including source and destination IP address TCP UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code show ip access list Displays the rules for configured IP PE 4 123 ACLs access list ip Accesses the IP Mask mode used to GC 4 123 mask precedence configure access control mask mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL IP Mask 4 125 rules show access list ip Shows the ingress or egress rule masks PE 4 128 mask precedence for IP ACLs ip access group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4 129 show ip Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4 129 access gtoup map access list ip Sets the CoS value and corresponding IC 4 130 output queue for packets matching an ACL rule show map Shows CoS value mapped to an access PE 4 132 access list ip list for an interface match access list ip Changes the 802 1p priority IP IC 4 133 Precedence or DSCP Priority of a frame matching the defined rule i e also called packet marking show marking Displays the current configuration for PE 4 134 packet marking 4 117 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE access list ip This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs Use the no form
125. 4 90 Whichboots 13420008 at giet a ta 4 91 POOL YE LAAN Bei tii cin AN a Ae lS TAN sas PI A 4 92 Authentication Commands 0oooocccccccoconnnoccc rrer rrn 4 93 Authentication Sequence 1 6 eee ee eee 4 93 authentication lona sda iene a eae ed 4 94 RADIUS Client cats hed ti bd 4 95 radius server host goets ge IA an a ee eens 4 95 radius setver portos g eee ee eee 4 96 tadius setvet A dant teen os ae apne eae 4 97 ix CONTENTS radius server retransmit 2 6 eee 4 97 radius server timeout 1 1 2 6 eee cee eee 4 98 show tadius servet 6 cece cee eee 4 98 WAGA CSa CM do a cal Bia cae Eek 4 99 tacaes servet host asii aria iia 4 99 tACACSSELVEL POL nes Ly dia ie a do ali alado 4 100 tacacs servet key secda go dirare t Ner E AE E S 4 101 how tacacs s ryet is iai M a ea aaan la 4 101 Port Security Commands 0 cece eee eee 4 102 DOLESECUTIN dat IW epee Gi ie ite dare 4 102 802 1x Port Authentication 00 cece eee 4 104 authentication dotlx default oooo ooooommo 4 105 dot deta all aaa da 4 106 DOLL Marteg OA A A A ROA 4 106 dotlxporteconttol iio da a cis an 4 107 dotlx operation mode 0 eee eee eee 4 108 dotlx re authenticate 2 0 eee eee 4 108 dotlx re authentication 6 eee eee 4 109 dotlx timeout quiet period 0 4 109 dotlx timeout re authperiod 00000 4 110 dotlx timeout tx petiod 0 eee eee eee 4 110 show doth ns a Si eh I
126. 521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150 45306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 Set the Optional Parameters On the SSH Settings page configure the optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size Enable SSH Service On the SSH Settings page enable the SSH server on the switch USER AUTHENTICATION 6 Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Notes 1 To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known
127. 5cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active spanning tree mst configuration interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 lacp partner admin key 0 spanning tree edge port interface vlan 1 ip address 10 1 0 1 255 255 255 0 line console line vty end Console Related Commands show startup config 4 77 4 81 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show system This command displays system information Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e For a description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 3 12 The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates FAIL contact your distributor for assistance Example Console show system System information System Name System Location System Contact MAC address Web server Web server port Web secure server Web secure server port POST result Done All Pass Console System Up time 0 days DUMMY TOSE I ato ss UART Loopback Test DRAM TEBE onda as Timer Test sessa eno PCE Device 1 TESE ri Switch Int Loopback Test Crossbar Int Loopback Test System description SMC Networks SMC8648T System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 37 2 hours 3 minutes and 47 49 seconds R amp D5 WC 9 Geoff 00 00 A3 42
128. A 3 129 4 220 port security configuring 3 48 4 102 port statistics 3 106 4 179 ports autonegotiation 3 84 4 170 broadcast storm threshold 3 101 4 176 capabilities 3 84 4 172 duplex mode 3 84 4 169 flow control 3 84 4 173 forced selection on combo ports 3 82 4 174 speed 3 84 4 169 ports configuring 3 80 4 167 ports mirroring 3 103 4 183 priority default port ingress 3 163 4 256 problems troubleshooting B 1 protocol migration 3 133 4 227 INDEX Q queue weights 3 168 4 259 R RADIUS logon authentication 3 34 4 95 rate limits setting 3 104 4 185 remote logging 4 62 restarting the system 3 26 4 29 RSTP 3 116 4 207 global configuration 3 117 4 207 S secute shell 3 41 4 45 Secure Shell configuration 3 41 4 49 4 50 serial port configuring 4 14 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP SNMP 3 30 community string 3 30 4 150 enabling traps 3 31 4 154 trap manager 3 31 4 152 software displaying version 3 14 4 83 downloading 3 22 4 86 Spanning Tree Protocol See STA specifications software A 1 SSH configuring 3 41 4 49 4 50 STA 3 116 4 205 edge port 3 129 3 132 4 221 global settings configuring 3 121 4 206 4 213 global settings displaying 3 117 4 228 Index 3 INDEX interface settings 3 126 3 137 3 139 4 219 4 227 4 228 link type 3 129 3 132 4 223 path cost 3 118 3 128 4 219 path cost method 3 124 4 212 port priority 3 129 4 220 protocol migrat
129. AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server key key_string no radius server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server key green Console config radius server retransmit This command sets the number of retries Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no radius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 4 97 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config radius server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout number_of_seconds no radius server timeout number_of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config
130. C A7 Console Field Description Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch System Priority LACP system priority for this channel group System MAC Address System MAC address The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID Address Table Commands These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Table 4 36 Adress Table Commands aging time address table Command Function Mode Page mac address table Maps a static address to a portin GC 4 201 static a VLAN clear Removes any learned entries PE 4 202 mac address table dynamic from the forwarding database show mac address table Displays entries in the PE 4 202 bridge forwarding database mac address table aging time Sets the aging time of the address GC 4 203 table show mac address table Shows the aging time for the PE 4 204 4 200 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE mac 4 201 address table static This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac address table static mac address interface interface vlan v an d action no mac address table static macaddress vlan vlan 1d mac address MAC address o interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port
131. CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch 3 25 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Console copy tftp startup config 3 86 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console reload If you download the startup configuration file under a new file name you can set this file as the startup file at a later time and then restart the switch Console config Console config boot system config startup new 3 92 Console config exit Console reload 3 29 Resetting the System Web Click System Reset Click the Reset button to restart the switch Reset the switch by selecting Reset Reset Figure 3 12 Resetting the System CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch Console reload 3 29 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt Note When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test 3 26 BASIC CONFIGURATION Setting the System Clock Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries You
132. COMMANDS show ip igmp snooping This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 182 for a description of the displayed items Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count 2 Query interval 125 sec Query max response time 10 sec Router port expire time 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console show mac address table multicast This command shows known multicast addresses Syntax show mac address table multicast vlan v an id user igmp snooping e vlan id VLAN ID 1 to 4094 e user Display only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping 4 276 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 11 IGMP Console IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 4 277 Table 4 50 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 router port expir
133. Commands Layer 3 and 4 0 4 263 e 4 48 Multicast Filtering Commands 0085 4 272 e 4 49 IGMP Snooping Commands 000 0000s 4 272 e 4 50 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 oo oomooo o 4 277 e 4 51 Static Multicast Routing Commands 4 282 e 4 52 Basic IP Configuration commands 4 284 e B 1 Troubleshooting Chart 0 cece eee B 1 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 FIGURES Homepage 0 beee teese ee betes cada 3 3 Panel Display eii ae ttt ate Aa oe ee as 3 4 System Information 0 cece cece eee eee 3 13 Switch Information eere ereke aE eE EREEREER E 3 15 Bridge Extension Configuration o o o ooooommmo 3 17 Manual IP Configuration 00 e eee eee 3 19 DHCP IP Configuration 0 00 0 c cee eee 3 20 Operation Code Image File Transfer o o o 3 23 Select Start Up Operation File ooooo oooooo o 3 23 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server 3 25
134. Configures individual trunk settings for 3 130 STA MSTP VLAN Configuration Configures priority and VLANs for a 3 133 spanning tree instance Port Information Displays port settings for a specified MST 3 137 instance Trunk Information Displays trunk settings for a specified MST 3 137 instance Port Configuration Configures port settings for a specified 3 139 MST instance Trunk Configuration Configures trunk settings for a specified 3 139 MST instance NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page VLAN 3 141 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enables GVRP VLAN registration 3 146 protocol Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type 3 146 supported by this switch Current Table Shows the current port members of each 3 147 VLAN and whether or not the port is tagged or untagged Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3 149 Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3 151 Static Membership Configures membership type for interfaces 3 153 including tagged untagged or forbidden Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN 3 154 attributes Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN 3 154 attributes Private VLAN Status Enables or disables the private VLAN 3 158 Link Status Configures the private VLAN 3 159 Protocol VLAN Configuration Creates a protocol group specifying the 3 160 s
135. Console config if mac access group jerry in Console config if Related Commands show mac access list 4 139 4 144 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS show mac access group This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access group Interface ethernet 1 5 MAC access list M5 out Console Related Commands mac access group 4 144 map access list mac This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping Syntax no map access list mac ac _name cos cos value acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters cos value CoS value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 145 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule e A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown below Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 fi Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Example Console config int eth 1 5 Console config if map access list mac M5 cos 0 Console config if Related Commands queue cos map 4 260 show map access list mac 4 146 show map access
136. D 3 116 4 207 IEEE 802 1s 4 207 IEEE 802 1w 3 116 4 207 IEEE 802 1x 4 104 IGMP groups displaying 3 187 4 276 Layer 2 3 182 4 272 query 3 182 4 278 query Layer 2 3 183 4 277 snooping 3 182 4 273 snooping configuring 3 182 4 272 ingress filtering 3 155 4 238 Index 2 IP address BOOTP DHCP 3 20 4 285 setting 2 6 3 17 4 285 IP port priority enabling 3 175 4 264 mapping priorities 3 175 4 264 IP precedence enabling 3 170 4 265 mapping priorities 3 171 4 266 J jumbo frame 4 84 L link type STA 3 129 3 132 4 223 logging syslog traps 4 62 to syslog servers 4 60 log in Web interface 3 3 logon authentication 3 33 4 93 RADIUS client 3 34 4 95 RADIUS server 3 34 4 95 TACACS client 3 34 3 35 4 99 TACACS server 3 34 3 35 4 99 logon authentication sequence 3 36 4 94 M main menu 3 5 Management Information Bases MIBs A 4 mirror port configuring 3 103 4 183 MSTP 4 207 global settings 3 133 4 205 interface settings 4 206 multicast filtering 3 181 4 272 multicast groups 3 187 4 276 displaying 4 276 static 3 187 4 274 4 276 multicast services configuring 3 188 4 274 displaying 3 187 4 276 multicast static router port 3 186 4 282 P password line 4 17 passwords 2 5 administrator setting 3 33 4 35 path cost 3 118 3 128 method 3 124 4 212 STA 3 118 3 128 4 212 port authentication 4 104 port priority configuring 3 163 4 255 default ingress 3 163 4 256 ST
137. D LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1ix timeout quiet period 350 Console config dot1x timeout re authperiod This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Syntax dotlx timeout re authperiod seconds no dotlx timeout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 3600 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx timeout re authperiod 300 Console config dot1x timeout tx period This command sets the time that the switch waits during an authentication session before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dotlx timeout tx period seconds no dotlx timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 4 110 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Default 30 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx timeout tx period 300 Console config show dot1x This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface Syntax show dot1x statistics interface nterface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the following information Global 802 1X Parameters Displays the global port access control paramet
138. DNS Commands These commands are used to configure Domain Naming System DNS services You can manually configure entries in the DNS domain name to IP address mapping table configure default domain names or specify one of more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Note that domain name services will not be enabled until at least one name server is specified with the ip name server command and domain lookup is enabled with the ip domain lookup command Table 4 31 DNS Commands Command Function Mode Page ip host Creates a static host name to address GC 4 158 mapping clear host Deletes entries from the host PE 4 159 name to address table ip domain name Defines a default domain name for GC 4 159 incomplete host names ip domain list Defines a list of default domain names for GC 4 160 incomplete host names ip name setver Specifies the address of one or more name GC 4 162 servers to use for host name to address translation ip domain lookup Enables DNS based host name to address GC 4 163 translation show hosts Displays the static host name to address PE 4 164 mapping table show dns Displays the configuration for DNS services PE 4 165 show dns cache Displays entries in the DNS cache PE 4 165 clear dns cache Clears all entries from the DNS cache PE 4 166 4 157 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip host 4 158 This command creates a static entry i
139. DSCP and default switchport priority DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces 4 268 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Hmap ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config 1f show map ip port Use this command to show the IP port priority map Syntax show map ip port interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0 Console show map ip port TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 80 0 Console 4 269 PRIORITY COMMANDS Related Commands map ip port Global Configuration 4 264 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 264 show map ip precedence This command shows the IP precedence priority map Syntax show map ip precedence nterface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Co
140. Default 3 SSH Server Key Size Specifies the SSH server key size Range 512 896 bits The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Web Click Security SSH Settings Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required then click Apply Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server SSH Server Settings SSH Server Status Enabled z Version 2 0 SSH Authentication Timeout 1 120 f100 seconds SSH Authentication Retries 1 5 ff Z SSH Sener Key Size 612 696 2 Figure 3 21 SSH Server Settings 3 47 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example enables SSH sets the authentication parameters and displays the current configuration It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH and then disables this connection Console config ip ssh server 3 48 Console config ip ssh timeout 100 3 49 Console config ip ssh authentication retries 5 3 50 Console config tip ssh server key size 512 3 51 Console config end Console show ip ssh 3 54 SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh 3 55 Information of secure shell Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state 0
141. Displaying Remote LACP Port Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the remote side of port channel 1 Console show 1 lacp neighbors 3 196 Channel group 1 neighbors Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 01 Partner Admin Port Number 1 Partner Oper Port Number 1 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Console PORT CONFIGURATION Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic for each port Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default The default threshold is 500 packets per second e Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic e The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch
142. DmYPXFum1Yg0fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 wOW Console 4 57 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Event Logging Commands Table 4 14 Event Logging Commands Command Function Mode Page logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4 58 logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch GC 4 59 memory based on severity logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will GC 4 60 receive logging messages logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of GC 4 61 syslog messages logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote GC 4 62 server based on severity clear logging Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4 62 show logging Displays the state of logging PE 4 63 logging on This command controls logging of error messages sending debug or error messages to switch memory The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that 4 58 are stored SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 4 59 clear logging 4 62 logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity
143. E The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config line password 0 secret Console config line Related Commands login 4 16 password thresh 4 19 exec timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the number of seconds Range 0 65535 seconds 0 no timeout Default Setting CLI No timeout Telnet 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Ifuser input is detected within the timeout interval the session is kept open otherwise the session is terminated This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled 4 18 LINE COMMANDS Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line password thresh This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh zhreshold
144. Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Migration If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration but
145. GURING THE SWITCH 3 128 Port Role Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge i e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge e designated port or is the MSTI regional root i e master port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges bridge ports or LANs fail or are removed The role is set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree Alternate port receives more R Root Port useful BPDUs from another A Alternate Port bridge and is therefore not D Designated Port selected as the designated B Backup Port port R R art JD B J Xx Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated port T D x ji Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Information only These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Admin status Shows if this interface is enabled External path cost The path cost for the IST This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority SPANNING TREE ALGORITH
146. Global Configuration 4 267 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 268 show Map Ip port bis eae Ge cages i BY aida 4 269 show map ip precedence ooooooocccccccooocoo 4 270 show map ip dsep i esaa Mea an e 4 271 xiv CONTENTS Multicast Filtering Commands 0 6 0 cee eee eee 4 272 IGMP Snooping Commands 6 0 0 cece eee eee 4 272 pimp OOPS ick sos eed eae a 4 273 ip igmp snooping vlan static 6 6 eee eee 4 274 ip igmp snooping version 1 1 6 eee eee 4 275 show ip igmp snooping 6 6 eee ee eee 4 276 show mac address table multicast o o o 4 276 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 1 0 0 ee eee 4 277 ip igmp snooping quetier 2 6 eee eee eee 4 278 ip igmp snooping query count 0 0 eee eee 4 278 ip igmp snooping query interval ooo ooooomoo o 4 279 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 280 ip igmp snooping router port expire time 4 281 Static Multicast Routing Commands 00005 4 282 ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 0000 0 eee 4 282 show ip igmp snooping mrouter 0008 4 283 IP Interface Commands icc dete iia bones arena duane 4 284 Basic IP Configuration 0 eee ee eee 4 284 ipaddress ari dai 4 285 ip dhep restati a iat al Oa ee a 4 286 ip default gateway 6 ee cee eee 4 287 SHOW ip interface aa iv aged ARA AL lis 4 288 shOw ip teditects nia aida 4 288 PHS aig Hak
147. ITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enable disable nstance Vlans configuration Priority Bridge Hello Time sec Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time Transmission limit Path Cost Method 20 20 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 200000 sean 3 3380 ong Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option 3 121 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 122 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming pr
148. L LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE USE PERFORMANCE FAILURE OR INTERRUPTION OF ITS PRODUCTS EVEN IF SMC OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR CONSUMER PRODUCTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE TAKEN TO AFFECT YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS SMC will provide warranty service for one year following discontinuance from the active SMC price list Under the limited lifetime warranty internal and external power supplies fans and cables are covered by a standard one year warranty from date of purchase SMC Networks Inc 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 CONTENTS Intt duction LEAR 1 1 Wey Features in a a a ae 1 1 Description of Software Features 2 6 6 cee eee eee 1 2 System Default didas Sak dis ads Baise Goad dea Hades Joao Snes 1 7 Initial Configuration 2 0 0 0 cece cece ee eee 2 1 Connecting to the Switch 23 45 24 00 id he pith ta edad 2 1 Configuration Options 2 6 6 2 1 Required Connections 0 0 2 0 cee cece eee eee 2 2 Remote Connections sosio hh Vad eee eats ee ete ates fae Da 2 4 Basic Contiouration sia Andee ht Stn A hn ee ee 2 4 Console Connection s sea dodam ran Aeae E eee 2
149. LANs Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add vlan ist remove v an list no switchport forbidden vlan add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove v an list List of VLAN identifiers to remove vlan list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting No VLANs are included in the forbidden list Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP e Ifa VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface 4 241 VLAN COMMANDS Example The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 3 Console config if Displaying VLAN Information Table 4 41 Displaying VLAN Information Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE 4 242 PE show interfaces status Displays status for the specified VLAN NE 4 178 vlan interface PE show interfaces Displays the administrative and NE 4 181 switchport operational status of an interface PE show vlan This command shows VLAN information Syntax
150. LANs It simplifies network management provides for even faster convergence than RSTP by limiting the size of each region and prevents VLAN members from being segmented from the rest of the group as sometimes occurs with IEEE 802 1D STP 1 5 INTRODUCTION 1 6 Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 255 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can e Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network Simplify network management for node changes moves by remotely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than having to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN e Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink ports thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured Traffic Prioritization This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level o
151. M CONFIGURATION Internal path cost The path cost for the MST See the proceeding item Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same the port with the highest priority 1 e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Fast forwarding This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Admin Edge Port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state
152. MMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 78 Command Usage Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by mode command and corresponding commands This command ey symbols and includes the configuration displays the following information SNMP community strings Users names and access levels VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for VLANs Routing protocol configuration settings Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console show startup config building startup config please wait username admin access level 15 username admin password 0 admin username guest access level 0 username guest password 0 guest enable password level 15 0 super snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active spanning tree mst configuration interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 lacp partner admin key 0 spanning tree edge port interface vlan 1 ip address dhcp line con
153. MOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 Console Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command REMOTELOG Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging status trap command REMOTELOG The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as facility type specified in the logging facility command SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Field Description REMOTELOG The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote level type server as specified in the logging trap command REMOTELOG The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging server IP address host command Related Commands show logging sendmail 4 69 SMTP Alert Commands Configures SMTP event handling and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients Table 4 15 SMTP Alert Commands Command Function Mode Page logging sendmail host Specifies SMTP servers that will be sent GC 4 66 alert messages logging sendmail Sets the severity threshold used to trigger GC 4 67 level alert messages logging sendmail Sets the email address used for From GC 4 67 source email field of alert messages logging sendmail Specifies the email recipients of alert GC 4 68 destination email messages logging sendmail E
154. MP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service This procedure is called multicast filtering The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN 3 181 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 3 182 IGMP Snooping and Query If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and Query page 3 182 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier i e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on your switch page 3 186 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffic
155. Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 3 123 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 124 Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states 1 e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 Configuration Settings for RSTP The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This is the default Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 Configuration Settings for MSTP Max Instance Numbers The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this switch can be assigned Default 65 Region Revision
156. N Ci Snes Binge he OM heehee 4 216 YEVISI N arrete yang by d vase EEE E EEEE vues 4 217 IR HO PSs Reig A IA ada 4 218 spanning tree spanning disabled ooooooooommmo o 4 219 spanning tfee cost oc ct ee eee eri 4 219 spanning tree port priority 6 eee eee 4 220 spanning tree edge port 2 6 eee eee eee 4 221 spanning tree portfast 6 eee eee 4 222 spanning tree link type 6 ee cece eee 4 223 spanning tree Mst COSt sisi eee eee 4 224 spanning tree mst port priority 2 6 6 eee eee 4 226 spanning tree protocol migration oooooooccooommoo 4 227 show spanning tree 6 eee eee 4 228 show spanning tree mst configuration oooooooommmo 4 230 VLAN Commands o noni T het toh AAG Sele ao RAE 4 231 Editing VLAN Groups 2 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 4 231 ylan databases ts iii Ce 4 232 er a EE EEE SA E EE 4 233 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 0 ee eee eee eee 4 234 interface la 24 feds ov tn a ae a 4 235 switchport mode seess ini bee his a cae ee 4 236 switchport acceptable frame types oooomoocooooo 4 237 switchport ingress filtering 2 1 2 0 0 eee eae 4 238 switchport native vlan 6 ee eee 4 239 switchport allowed vlan 0 0 cece eee 4 240 switchport forbidden vlan 1 0 0 0 0 eee eee 4 241 CONTENTS Displaying VLAN Information 00 0 00000 4 242 Show viata E ee es oS oe od ik SD hes 4 242 Configuring Protocol based VLANS o ooooomcoccoooo 4 243 protocol vlan protocol g
157. N The domain name associated with this record clear dns cache This command clears all entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console Console clear dns cache Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN 4 166 DNS COMMANDS 4 167 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN Table 4 32 Interface Commands switchport operational status of an interface Command Function Mode Page interface Configures an interface type and GC 4 168 enters interface configuration mode description Adds a description to an interface IC 4 168 configuration speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex IC 4 169 operation of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given IC 4 170 interface capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given IC 4 172 interface for use in autonegotiation flowcontrol Enables flow control on a given IC 4 173 interface combo forced mode Force port type selected for IC 4 174 combination ports shutdown Disables an interface IC 4 175 switchport broadcast Configures the broadcast storm IC 4 176 packet rate control threshold clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 4 177 show interfaces status Displays status for the
158. ONTROL LISTS Web Click Security ACL Mask Configuration Click Edit for one of the basic mask types to open the configuration page ACL Mask Configuration Mask Type Mask Action Edit IP Ingress Edit IP Egress Edit MAC Ingress Edit MAC Egress Edit Figure 3 31 Choosing ACL Types CLI This example creates an IP ingress mask and then adds two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console config access list ip mask precedence in 3 123 Console config ip mask acl mask host any 3 125 Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl Configuring an IP ACL Mask This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Command Usage Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Command Attributes Src Dst IP Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to match any address Host to specify a host address not a 3 71 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH subnet or IP to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host IP Default Any Src Dst IP Bitmask Source or destination address of rule must match this bitmask See the description for SubMask on page 3 63 e Prot
159. Protection Broadcast Limit Rate 500 packets per second Spanning Tree Status Enabled MSTP Exc Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 15 Fast Forwarding Edge Port Disabled Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds 1 8 SYSTEM DEFAULTS Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Disabled Switchport Mode Egress Hybrid tagged untagged Mode frames GVRP global Disabled GVRP port interface Disabled Traffic Ingress Port Priority 0 Enpritizanon Weighted Round Robin Queue 01234567 Priority 20134567 IP Precedence Priority Disabled IP DSCP Priority Disabled IP Settings IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Disabled BOOTP Disabled Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Snooping Enabled Querier Enabled System Log Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels 0 7 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 SMTP Email Event Handler Disabled Alerts SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled 1 9 INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 2 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agent offers a variety of management options including SNMP RMON and a Web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitori
160. Protocol Type The only option for the LLC_other frame type is IPX_raw The options for all other frames types include IP ARP RARP VLAN CONFIGURATION Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Configuration Enter a protocol group ID frame type and protocol type then click Apply Protocol VLAN Configuration Current New Group 1 Ethernet 08 00 Protocol Gruop ID 1 2147483647 Group 1 Ethernet 08 06 meee Protocol Gruop ID 1 21 Frame Type Ethernet y Remove Protocol Type Ip y Figure 3 68 Protocil VLAN Configuration CLI The following creates protocol group 1 and then specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip 3 244 Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config Mapping Protocols to VLANs Map a protocol group to a VLAN for each interface that will participate in the group Command Usage When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces using this configuration screen If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands such as VLAN Static Table page 3 151 or VLAN Static Membership page 3 153 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN 3 161 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 162 When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is
161. RADIUS or TACACS authentication if selected and click Apply Authentication Settings Authentication TACACS RADIUS Local y RADIUS Settings Server IP Address foror Server Port Number faz Secret Text String peo oO Number of Server Transmits Ro Timeout for a reply sec Boo TACACS Settings Server IP Address 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number 49 Secret Text String ne Figure 3 18 Setting Local RADIUS and TACACS Authentication 3 37 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Console config Console config Console config Console config Console config Console config Console show rad Server IP addres Communication k Retransmit time Console config Console config Console config Console config Console show tac Server IP addres Communication k Console config radius server radius server radius server radius server radius server authentication login radius host 192 168 1 25 port 181 key green retransmit 5 timeout 10 Request timeout lus server s 192 168 1 25 ey with radius server Server port number 181 s 5 10 authentication login tacacs tacacs server host 10 20 30 40 tacacs server port 200 tacacs server key green acs server s 10 20 30 40 ey with tacacs server green Server port number 200 3 94 3595 3 96 3 97 3 97 3 98 3 98 3 94 3 99 3 100 3 101 3 101 Configuring
162. S Command Usage The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 6699 66 99 ce 99 ANS Due to the size limit of the flash memoty the switch supports only two operation code files The maximum number of user defined configuration files depends on available memory You can use Factory_Default_Config cfg as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination For information on specifying an https certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 40 For information on configuring the switch to use HTTPS SSL for a secure connection see ip http server on page 4 41 4 87 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 88 Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server Console copy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup 01 TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows
163. Selecting the Startup Configuration File 3 25 Resetting the System 00 eee eee 3 26 SNTP Configuration lt 2 00 52 00 tacon arre 3 28 Setting the Time Zone mesce 0 6 0 cee eee eee 3 29 Setting Community Access Strings oo o o ooooooo 3 31 Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 3 32 Configuring the Logon Password oooo o oooooo 3 34 Setting Local RADIUS and TACACS Authentication 3 37 HT TIPS Settings concen gene at teed 3 39 SSH Host Key Settings 0 cee eee eee 3 45 SSH Server Settings 0 cece eee ee eee 3 47 Configuring Port Security ooooooooooccomoooo 3 50 802 1 x Informations 7 assed ves iach E a 3 53 802 1x Configuration i c ce eee ee 3 56 802 1x Port Configuration 0 3 57 SO2Z AS tatistiGs arca la Sadao gas deat 3 59 Naming and Choosing ACLs 0 000000 3 62 Configuring Standard IP ACLs 0005 3 63 Configuring Extended IP ACLs oooococooooooo 3 66 Configuring MAC ACLs 0 00 eee eee eee 3 69 Choosing ACL Types oimocociociniia ci 3 71 Configuring an IP based ACL oooooccccooooo 3 73 Configuring a MAC based ACL ooooocccccoooo 3 75 Mapping ACLs to Port Ingress Egress Queues 3 77 Filtering Management Access 0 0000 e eee 3 79 Port Status Information 0 0 cc eee eee eee 3 81 FIGURES Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43
164. TION COMMANDS Default Setting Status Disabled Action None Maximum Addresses 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage If you enable port security the switch will stop dynamically learning new addresses on the specified port Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted To use port security first allow the switch to dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on a port for an initial training period and then enable port security to stop address learning Be sure you enable the learning function long enough to ensure that all valid VLAN members have been registered on the selected port To add new VLAN members at a later time you can manually add secure addresses with the mac address table static command or turn off port security to re enable the learning function long enough for new VLAN members to be registered Learning may then be disabled again if desired for security A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot use port monitoring Cannot be a multi VLAN port Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device Cannot be a trunk port If a port is disabled due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled using the no shutdown command 4 103 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example enables port security for port 5 and sets the
165. Telnet or console connection Range 0 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Specifying session identifier 0 will disconnect the console connection Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection 4 24 LINE COMMANDS Example Console disconnect 1 Console Related Commands show ssh 4 55 show users 4 83 show line This command displays the terminal line s parameters Syntax show line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access 1 e Telnet Default Setting Shows all lines Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example To show all lines enter this command Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times nteractive timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate 9600 Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 Vty configuration Password threshold nteractive timeout 3 times 65535 4 25 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE General Commands Table 4 6 General Commands Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 4 26 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4 27 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4 28 show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 4 28 reload Restarts the system PE 4 29 end Returns to Privileged Exec
166. The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram evel no logging history flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset level One of the levels listed below Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Name Level Description debugging 7 Debugging messages informational 6 Informational messages only notifications 5 Normal but significant condition such as cold start warnings 4 Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return errors 3 Error conditions e g invalid input default used critical 2 Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release 4 59 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Name Level Description alerts 1 Immediate action needed emergencies 0 System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release Default Setting Flash errors level 3 0 RAM warnings level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority i e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Co
167. TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Si A A A A a A a a A A G 24 48 auto MDI MDI X 10 100 1000BASE T ports 4 ports shared with 4 SFP transceiver slots Non blocking switching architecture Support for a redundant power unit Spanning Tree Protocol Rapid STP and Multiple STP Up to six LACP or static 8 port trunks Layer 2 3 4 CoS support through 8 priority queues Layer 3 4 traffic priority with IP Precedence and IP DSCP Full support for VLANs with GVRP IGMP multicast filtering and snooping Support for jumbo frames up to 9 KB Manageable via console Web and SNMP RMON SMC 2 Management Guide sime SMC8624 48T Networks TigerSwitch 10 100 1000 Management Guide From SMC s Tiger line of feature rich workgroup LAN solutions SMC Networks 38 Tesla April 2004 Irvine CA 92618 Phone 949 679 8000 Pub 1502000410004 Information furnished by SMC Networks Inc SMC is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use No license is granted by implication or oth erwise under any patent or patent rights of SMC SMC reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice Copyright 2004 by SMC Networks Inc 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 All rights reserved Trademarks SMC is a registered trademark and EZ Switch TigerStack and TigerSwitch a
168. Type of ACL IP or MAC e CoS Priority CoS value used for packets matching an IP ACL rule Range 0 7 For information on configuring ACLs see page 3 60 3 177 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority ACL CoS Priority Enable mapping for any port select an ACL from the scroll down list then click Apply ACL CoS Priority ACL CoS Priority Configure Port Name Type Pre Promy Mamea as ACL CoS Priority Mapping Port Name Type CoS Priority 1 bill IP D Remove CLI This example assigns a CoS value of zero to packets matching rules within the specified ACL on port 24 Console config interface ethernet 1 24 3 168 Console config if map access list ip bill cos 0 3 130 Console config if Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules You can change traffic priorities for frames matching the defined ACL tule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking This switch can change the IEEE 802 1p priority IP Precedence or DSCP Priority of IP frames or change the IEEE 802 1p priority of Layer 2 frames This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking Use the no form to remove the ACL marker 3 178 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can change priorities based on a tule Traffic priorities may be included in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag This tag is al
169. Usage e Static entries may be used for local devices connected directly to the attached network or for commonly used resources located elsewhere on the network Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name in the static table or via information returned from a name server a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device 3 193 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Field Attributes Host Name Name of a host device that is mapped to one or more IP addresses Range 1 64 characters IP Address Internet address es associated with a host name Range 1 8 addresses Alias Displays the host names that are mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry Web Select DNS Static Host Table Enter a host name and one or more corresponding addresses then click Apply Static Host Table Host Name IP Address Alias 1d5 10 10 55 res Spee 192 168 1 55 EEE Add Static Host Host Name IP Address 1 IP Address 2 IP Address 3 IP Address 4 IP Address 5 IP Address 6 f IP Address 7 IP Address 8 Aaa Figure 3 86 Mapping IP Addresses to a Host Name CLI This example maps two address to a host name and then configures an alias host name for the same addresses
170. a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 40 Command Attributes HTTPS Status Allows you to enable disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch Default Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s web interface Default Port 443 Web Click Security HTTPS Settings Enable HTTPS and specify the port number then click Apply HTTPS Settings HTTPS Status Enabled z Change HTTPS Port Number 1 658535 4a1 Figure 3 19 HTTPS Settings 3 39 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 40 CLI This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number Console config ip http secure server 3 42 Console config tip http secure port 441 3 44 Console config Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS for secure access a Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate appears for the switch By default the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a
171. abled E E fiooo oa 3 3 B Tagged F Enabled Enabled feo so foo Hybrid gt a ft A E MT Enabled M Enabled 20 feo to00 Pyora 5 M AL E M Enabled M Enabled 30 fpo f2000 Hybrid z 6 fi fa y F Enabled Enabled feo eo 1000 Hybrid y zj Figure 3 65 Configuring VLAN Ports CLI This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID enables GVRP sets the GARP timers and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 3 3 168 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged 3 237 Console config if switchport ingress filtering 3 238 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 3 239 Console config if switchport gvrp 3 252 Console config if garp timer join 20 3 253 Console config if tgarp timer leave 90 Console config if tgarp timer leaveall 2000 Console config if switchport mode hybrid 3 236 Console config 1f 3 157 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Private VLANs 3 158 Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Uplink Ports Primary VLAN promiscuous ports Downlink Ports E L ADO Secondary VLAN private ports Enablin
172. ambiguous the system will prompt for further input ENTERING COMMANDS Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity In the logging history example typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the character to list keywords or parameters 4 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL Interface Line VLAN Database or MSTP You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list of possible show co mmands Console show access group access list bridge ext calendar dotlx garp gvrp history hosts interfaces ip lacp line logging mac mac address table management map marking port protocol vlan public key pvlan queue radius server running config snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system tacacs server users version vlan Console show Access groups Access lists Bridge extend information Date informatio
173. ame from the domain name 3 191 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Select DNS General Configuration Set the default domain name or list of domain names specify one or more name servers to use to use for address resolution enable domain lookup status and click Apply 3 192 General Configuration Domain Lookup Status V Enable Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Current New sample com uk lt lt Add Domain Name sample com jp Name Server List Current New 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 _ Add Name Server esi Remove Figure 3 85 Configuring DNS CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE CLI This example sets a default domain name and a domain list However remember that if a domain list is specified the default domain name is not used Console config ip domain name sample com 3 187 Console config ip domain list sample com uk 3 188 Console config ip domain list sample com jp Console config ip name server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 3 190 Console config H tip domain lookup 3 191 Console show dns 3 193 Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com uk sample com jp Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries You can manually configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map domain names to IP addresses Command
174. and Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access list MAC access list jerry permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 137 mac access group 4 144 access list mac mask precedence This command accesses MAC Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified MAC ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration 4 139 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet Example Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask acl Related Commands mask MAC ACL 4 140 mac access group 4 144 mask MAC ACL This command defines a mask for MAC ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Use the no form to remove a
175. and Usage A private VLAN provides port based security and isolation between ports within the VLAN Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from the uplink port Private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch 4 248 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Entering the pvlan command without any parameters enables the private VLAN Entering no pvlan disables the private VLAN Example This example enables the private VLAN and then sets port 24 as the uplink and ports 1 8 as the downlinks Console config pvlan Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 24 down link ethernet 1 5 8 Console config show pvlan This command displays the configured private VLAN Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 24 Down link port Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 8 Console 4 249 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Table 4 44 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Com
176. and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media 3 129 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or STA Trunk Information STA Port Information Spanning Forward Designated Designated Designated Oper Oper Trunk Port Tree STA Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Link Type Edge Port Pert Role Member 1 Enabled Forwarding 7 200000 32768 0 0030F1552000 128 24 oo Disabled Root 2 Enabled Discaring D 200000 61440 0 0000E9313131 128 2 a Enabled Disabled 3 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 51440 0 0000 E9313131 1283 Ea Enabled Disabled 4 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 61440 0 0000E9313131 128 4 nt Enabled Disabled 5 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 51440 0 0000E9313131 128 5 For to Enabled Disabled oint zj Figure 3 54 Displaying STA Port Status Information CLI This example shows the STA attributes for port 5 Eth 1 5 information Console show spanning tree ethernet 1 5 Admin status enable Role disable State discarding External p
177. ansmit Unicast Packets Transmit Broadcast Packets Transmit Errors 15020 Received Unicast Packets D 177 Recewed Broadcast 0 2 Packets Recemwed Unknown 0 Packets bl D Transmit Octets 168087 Transmit Multicast SA Packets 2420 Transmit Discarded 47 Packets p y zl Figure 3 47 Displaying Port Statistics Port CONFIGURATION Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors O Late Collisions 0 FCS Errors o f 0 Excessive Collisions D Single Collision Frames rosal MAC Transmit 0 rrors Multiple Collision Frames D Carrier Sense Errors D SQE Test Errors O Frames Too Long 0 Deferred Transmissions jemal MAC Recane D Errors RMON Statistics Drop Events O Jabbers 0 Received Bytes 188155 Collisions 0 Received Frames 064 Bytes Frames 2249 Broadcast Frames _47 65 127 Bytes Frames 459 Multicast Frames 2672 128 255 Bytes Frames 11 CRC Alignment Errors 0 256 511 Bytes Frames 0 Undersize Frames 0512 1023 Bytes Frames o Oversize Frames 0 1024 1518 Bytes Frames 0 Fragments 0 Refresh sl Figure 3 48 Displaying Etherlike and RMON Statistics 3 111 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows statistics for port 13 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 13 3 179 Ethernet 1 13 Iftable stats Octets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown pro
178. ap managers Table 4 30 SNMP Commands Command Function Mode Page snmp community Sets up the community access string to GC 4 150 permit access to SNMP commands snmp contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 151 snmp location Sets the system location string GC 4 151 snmp host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP GC 4 152 notification operation snmp enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps GC 4 154 i e SNMP notifications show snmp Displays the status of SNMP NE 4 155 communications PE 4 149 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE snmp community This command defines the community access string for the Simple Network Management Protocol Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp community string ro rw no snmp community string string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 e ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Default Setting e public Read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Gl
179. ard time forward time spanning tree hello time Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 210 hello time spanning tree max age Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 210 maximum age spanning tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 211 priority spanning tree Configures the path cost method for GC 4 212 path cost method RSTP MSTP spanning tree Configures the transmission limit for GC 4 213 transmission limit RSTP MSTP spanning tree Accesses MSTP configuration mode GC 4 213 mst configuration mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree MST 4 214 instance mst priority Configures the priority of a spanning MST 4 215 tree instance name Configures the name for the multiple MST 4 216 spanning tree revision Configures the revision number for the MST 4 217 multiple spanning tree max hops Configures the maximum number of MST 4 218 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Table 4 37 Spanning Tree Commands Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Disables spanning tree for an interface IC 4 219 spanning disabled spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost IC 4 219 of an interface spanning tree Configures the spanning tree priority of IC 4 220 port priority an interface spanning tree edge port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC 4 221 spanning tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC 4 222 spanning tree link type Configures
180. arity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin Password admin Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec from Normal Exec Level Password super P RADIUS Authentication Disabled TACACS Authentication Disabled 802 1x Port Authentication Disabled HTTPS Enabled SSH Enabled Port Security Disabled Web Management HTTP Server Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Port Number 443 SNMP Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Authentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled 1 7 INTRODUCTION Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Port Admin Status Enabled Configuration Auto negotiation Enabled Flow Conttol Disabled Port Capability 1000BASE T 10 Mbps half duplex 10 Mbps full duplex 100 Mbps half duplex 100 Mbps full duplex 1000 Mbps full duplex Full duplex flow control disabled Symmetric flow control disabled 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000 Mbps full duplex Full duplex flow control disabled Symmetric flow control disabled Rate Limiting Input and output limits Disabled Port Trunking Static Trunks None LACP all ports Disabled Broadcast Storm Status Enabled all ports
181. as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384 Example Console config mstp mst 1 priority 4096 Console config mstp name This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which this switch is located Use the no form to clear the name Syntax name name name Name of the spanning tree Default Setting Switch s MAC address Command Mode MST Configuration 4 216 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The MST region name and revision number page 4 217 are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp name R amp D Console config mstp Related Commands revision 4 217 revision 4 217 This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree configuration of this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax revision number number Revision number of the spanning tree Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name page 4 216 and revision number are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be config
182. ask is applied to the inbound packet Console Console Console Console config access list ip mask precedence in config ip mask acl mask host any config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any config ip mask acl This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry Console config access list ip standard A2 Console config std acl permit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std acl exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS This shows how to create a standard ACL with an ingress mask to deny access to the IP host 171 69 198 102 and permit access to any others Console config access list ip standard A2 Console config std acl permit any Console config std acl deny host 171 69 198 102 Console config std acl end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console configure Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any
183. ast domain of the frame Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use TEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration 3 143 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 144 Automatic VLAN Registration GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which each end station should be assigned If an end station or its network adapter supports the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN protocol it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join When this switch receives these messages it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and then forward the message to all other ports When the message arrives at another switch that
184. at were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed 3 109 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 110 Table 3 8 Port Statistics Parameter Description Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error 64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Web Click Port Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen Port Statistics Interface Pon 1 y C Trunk y Query Interface Statistics Received Octets Received Multicast Packets Received Discarded Packets Received Errors Tr
185. ate 4 29 A Boa eta ae ah tae ae cra be Id oa ah aN 4 30 cios 4 31 A A ao ios AO pios Aoi 4 31 vii CONTENTS System Management Commands 0 eee 4 32 Device Designation Commands 0 00 eee eee 4 33 Prompt Aew o ie as 4 33 hostname 4s Sciex Wetec ti Gui eG ek Lin 4 34 User Access Commands 0 0 000 ccc cece eee eee 4 34 USCIS jive ow sb de See SL Bh ade eel coed tale ERS 4 35 enable password ceci iria pe Ad 4 36 IP Filter Commands skroni cece eee 4 37 mana ement Ad n 4 38 show management 6 cee eee 4 39 Web Server Commands 0 cece cee eens 4 40 ip Http port a i a es a 4 41 ipshttpsserver se oss dicta eed ee oe Ree ee ae 4K 4 41 ip http secure setver 6 6 Roes aA ce eee eee 4 42 ip http secure port cid dit corel ded eh pj bi 4 44 Secure Shell Commands 0 00000 cece eee eens 4 45 IP PSSM SECUELA dpe Stee aed a 4 48 ip sshitimeouty Lydia A at a at A 4 49 ip ssh authentication retries 2 0 0 eee eee eee 4 50 ip ssh server key Size raaa a Aim eee eee 4 51 delete public key sneda nna dae aad 4 51 ip ssh crypto host key generate 00 0 cee 4 52 ip ssh CtyptO Zeroize ii ik ld AS 4 53 Ip ssh save host key sic a She a Bie aii 4 54 SHOWAPISSH A de daa 4 54 o A PaO tke T SE ace dante tien whl duet Shy 4 55 show public key sidna A a A 4 56 Event Logging Commands 0 cece eee eee 4 58 A 4 58 logoi History naoi s fie evens iii 4 59 loro hostia nico
186. ath cost 10000 Internal path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 200000 Designated port 128 5 Designated root 61440 0 0000E9313131 Designated bridge 61440 0 0000E9313131 Fast forwarding enable Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port enable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enable Configuring Interface Settings You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or shared media connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Command Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 126 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses
187. ation SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server However note that you also need to install an SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 Table 4 12 Secure Shell Commands Command Function Mode Page ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4 48 ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the GC 4 49 SSH server ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed by a GC 4 50 authentication tetries client ip ssh server key size Sets the SSH server key size GC 4 51 copy tftp public key Copies the user s public key from a TFTP PE 4 86 server to the switch delete public key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 4 51 4 45 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 46 Table 4 12 Secure Shell Commands Command Function Mode Page ip ssh crypto Generates the host key PE 4 52 host key generate ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM PE 4 53 ip ssh save host key Saves the host key from RAM to flash PE 4 54 memory disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 24 show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and PE 4 54 the config
188. ay through GC 4 286 which this switch can reach other subnetworks show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4 288 show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured PE 4 288 for this device ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to NE 4 289 another node on the network PE 4 284 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip address This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address ip address netmask bootp dhcp no ip address ip address IP address e netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP e dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP Default Setting IP address 0 0 0 0 Netmask 255 0 0 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the switch to existing IP subnets You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply
189. ay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic 4 208 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree Console config spanning tree mode rstp Console config spanning tree forward time This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it
190. ber of queue buffers provided for each port CLI displays this information as Priority for untagged traffic Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Port Priority Configuration Port Default Priority Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk 1 6 07 4 2 P 4 3 5 07 4 4 fe 07 4 5 P 07 4 Figure 3 70 Configuring Class of Service per Port CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 3 168 Console config if switchport priority default 5 3 256 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 5 3 181 Information of Eth 1 5 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second Lacp status Disabled Ingress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second Egress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 5 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console LASS OF SERVICE INFIGU ION CLASS OF SERVICE Co RATIO Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using eight priority queues for each port with service schedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to eight separate traffic prioriti
191. ble This command shows classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface interface vlan vlan id sort address vlan interface mac address MAC address mask Bits to match in the address interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 sort Sort by address vlan or interface 4 202 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types Learned Dynamic address entries Permanent Static entry Delete on reset Static entry to be deleted when system is reset The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC addtess Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit 0 means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit For example a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 00 00 00 00 17 1 Learned Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Delete on reset Conso
192. ble 4 3 Keystroke Commands 00 0 e eee eee 4 11 Table 4 4 Command Group Index n sunus sunnere rnnr 4 12 Table 4 5 Line Command Syntax 0 eee eee 4 14 Table 4 6 General Commands 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 4 26 Table 4 7 System Mangement Commands 00005 4 32 Table 4 8 Device Designation Commands 00005 4 33 Table 4 9 User Access Commands 0 cece eee ee eee 4 34 Table 4 10 IP Filter Commands 00 00 0c cee eee eee 4 37 Table 4 11 Web Server Command 00 c eee eee eee 4 40 Table 4 12 Secure Shell Commands 00 00 00 eee 4 45 Table 4 13 SSH Information 0 ccc eee eee 4 55 Table 4 14 Event Logging Commands 0 00 0 cece eee eee 4 58 Table 4 15 SMTP Alert Commands 0 000 e ee eee 4 65 Table 4 16 Time Commands 0 cece 4 70 Table 4 17 System Status Commands 0 000 ee ee eee 4 77 Table 4 18 Frame Size Commands 0 0 c eee eee eee 4 84 Table 4 19 Flash File Commands 0 0 0 cece eee eee e eee 4 85 Table 4 20 Authentication Commands 0 000 000 0 eee 4 93 Table 4 21 Authentication Sequence 0 ee ee eee 4 93 TABLES xvil Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab e 4 22 RADIUS Client Commands 00
193. ble 802 1x on port 2 and allows up to ten clients to connect to this port Console config tinterface ethernet 1 2 3 168 Console config if dot1x port control auto 3 107 Console config if dot1x operation mode multi host max count 10 3 108 Console config if H Displaying 802 1x Statistics This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Statistical Values Table 3 4 802 1x Statistics Parameter Descripton Rx EXPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Id The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently recetved EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC addtess carried in the most recent
194. bles autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable autonegotiation Syntax no negotiation Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 170 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands e If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDIX pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports Example The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands capabilities 4 172 speed duplex 4 169 4 171 INTEREACE COMMANDS capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax no capabilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric e 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half
195. bort PING to 10 1 0 9 by 5 32 byte payload ICMP packets timeout is 5 seconds response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 0 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 0 packets lost 0 Approximate round trip times Minimum 0 ms Maximum 10 ms Average 8 ms Console Related Commands interface 4 168 4 290 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 291 APPENDIX A SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS Software Features Authentication Local RADIUS TACACS Port 802 1x HTTPS SSH Port Security Access Control Lists IP MAC up to 32 lists DHCP Client Port Configuration SMC8624T 10 100 100BASE T Ports 1 24 1000BASE T 10 100 Mbps half full duplex 1000 Mbps full duplex SFP Ports 21 24 1000BASE X 1000 Mbps full duplex SMC8648T 10 100 100BASE T Ports 1 48 1000BASE T 10 100 Mbps half full duplex 1000 Mbps full duplex SFP Ports 45 48 1000BASE X 1000 Mbps full duplex Flow Control Full Duplex IEEE 802 3x Half Duplex Back pressure Broadcast Storm Control Traffic throttled above a critical threshold A 1 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS A 2 Port Mirroring Multiple source ports one destination port Rate Limits Input Limit Output limit Range configured per port Port Trunking Static trunks Cisco EtherChannel compliant Dynamic trunks Link Aggregation Control Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning T
196. ce CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of admin and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 1 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verification Username admin Password CLI session with the switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Telnet Connection 4 2 Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10
197. ceived Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Etherlike Statistics 3 107 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Table 3 8 Port Statistics Parameter Description Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors mis
198. cess group 4 144 show mac access list 4 139 4 136 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS permit deny MAC ACL This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address i e physical layer address or Ethernet protocol type Use the no form to remove a tule Syntax no permit deny any host source source address bitmask P y y any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask Note The default is for Ethernet II packets no permit deny tagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid wid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny untagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny tagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask no permit deny untagged 802 3 P y 88 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet IT packets tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets an
199. cfm action tech_support_drivers_downloads World Wide Web http www smc com http www smc europe com FOR LITERATURE OR ADVERTISING RESPONSE CALL U S A and Canada Spain UK France Italy Benelux Central Europe Nordic Eastern Europe Sub Saharian Africa North West Africa CIS PRC Taiwan Asia Pacific Korea Japan Australia India 800 SMC 4 YOU 34 9 1 352 00 40 44 0 1932 866553 33 0 41 38 32 32 39 0 335 5708602 31 33 455 72 88 49 0 89 92861 0 46 0 868 70700 34 93 477 4920 216 712 36616 34 93 477 4920 7 095 7893573 86 10 6235 4958 886 2 8797 8006 65 238 6556 82 2 553 0860 81 45 224 2332 61 2 8875 7887 91 22 8204437 Fax 949 679 1481 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Fax 44 0 118 974 8701 Fax 33 0 41 38 01 58 Fax 39 02 739 14 17 Fax 31 33 455 73 30 Fax 49 0 89 92861 230 Fax 46 0 887 62 62 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Fax 216 71751415 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Fax 7 095 789 35 73 Fax 86 10 6235 4962 Fax 886 2 8797 6288 Fax 65 238 6466 Fax 82 2 553 7202 Fax 81 45 224 2331 Fax 61 2 8875 7777 Fax 91 22 8204443 If you are looking for further contact information please visit www smc com www smec europe com or WWW smc asia com SMC Networks 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 Phone 949 679 8000 Model Number SMC8624 48T Pub Number 150200041000A Revision Number F1 1 0 4 E042004 RO1
200. chronization Admin State Aggregation Oper State Aggregation Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity _ Figure 3 42 Displaying LACP Port Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1 Console show 1 lacp internal 3 196 Channel group 1 Oper Key 4 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 4 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Console 3 98 PORT CONFIGURATION Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side of an link aggregation Neighbor Configuration Information Table 3 7 LACP Remote Side Settings Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol partn
201. cifies one or more time servers GC 4 71 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for GC 4 72 time sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4 72 sntp broadcast Accepts time from any time broadcast server GC 4 74 client show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE 4 74 PE clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal GC 4 75 clock calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4 76 show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE 4 76 PE 4 70 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS sntp server This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server 77 7p2 2p3 ip IP address of an time server NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console Related Commands sntp poll 4 72 show sntp 4 74 4 71 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE sntp poll This command sets the interval betwee
202. cocooommmm 3 Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules 3 Configuring Internet Group Management Protocol 3 Mapping Multicast Switch Ports to VLANs 3 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration 3 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3 Specifying Multicast Port Membership 3 Configuring DNS ss i aaa eee eee 3 Mapping IP Addresses toa Host Name 3 Displaying the DNS Cache 0 0 00 000 eee ee 3 172 174 175 XX CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching It includes a management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment Key Features Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Configuration Backup to TFTP server Backup and Restore Authentication Console Telnet web User name password RADIUS TACACS Web HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP Community strings IP address filtering Port IEEE 802 1x MAC address filtering Access Control Lists Supports up to 32 IP or MAC ACLs Port Configuration Speed duplex mode and flow control Rate Limiting Input and output rate limiting per port Po
203. col Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Configuring Access Control Lists 3 60 An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit tules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny tules the packet is accepted ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Command Usage The following restrictions apply to ACLs Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20 You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or th
204. commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Table 4 2 Configuration Commands Mode Command Prompt Page Line line console vty Console config line 4 14 Access access list ip standard Console config std acl 4 114 Control access list ip extended Console config ext acl List access list ip Console config ip mask acl mask precedence Console config mac acl access list mac Console config mac mask acl access list mac mask precedence Interface interface ethernet port Console config if 4 167 port channel d vlan zd ENTERING COMMANDS Table 4 2 Configuration Commands Mode Command Prompt Page VLAN vlan database Console config vlan 4 231 MSTP spanning tree Console config mstp 4 213 mst configuration For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config tinterface ethernet 1 5 Console config if exit Console config Command Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the follow
205. connection to the switch s Web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip http secure port port_number no ip http secure port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS SSL Range 1 65535 Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port Ifyou change the HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL in this format https device port_number Example Console config ttip http secure port 1000 Console config Related Commands ip http secure server 4 42 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Secure Shell Commands The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as r ogin remote login rsh remote shell and re remote copy ate not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch uses a public key that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access authentic
206. connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list WLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router e Portor Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router Web Click IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current New Vlan1 Unitl Port11 Interface Port y lt lt Add VLAN D 1 y Remove Port 1 Trunk 1 Figure 3 82 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration MULTICAST FILTERING CLI This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 3 282 Console config exit Console show ip igmp sno
207. control Command Attributes Name Allows you to label an interface Range 1 64 characters Admin Allows you to manually disable an interface You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also disable an interface for security reasons Speed Duplex Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode e Flow Control Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled you can force the settings for speed mode and flow control The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Gigabit only Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames or clear it to auto negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames FC Supports flow control PORT CONFIGURATION Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments
208. d Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and TEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation To force flow control on or off with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface INTEREACE COMMANDS When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To enable flow control under auto negotiation flowcontrol must be included in the capabilities list for any port Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Example The following example enables flow control on port 5 Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if lowcontrol config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 170 capabilities flowcontrol symmetric 4 172 combo forced mode This command forces the port type selected for combination ports 21 24 ot 45 48 Use the no form to restore the default mode Syntax comb
209. d packets Table 4 42 Protocol based VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page protocol vlan Create a protocol group specifying the GC 4 244 protocol group supported protocols protocol vlan Maps a protocol group to a VLAN IC 4 245 protocol group show protocol vlan Shows the configuration of protocol PE 4 246 protocol group groups show interfaces Shows the interfaces mapped to a PE 4 247 protocol vlan protocol group and the corresponding protocol group VLAN 4 243 VLAN COMMANDS To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 233 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the protocol vlan protocol group command General Configuration mode 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the protocol vlan protocol group command Interface Configuration mode protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups This command creates a protocol group adds specific protocols to a group Use the no form to remove a protocol group Syntax protocol vlan protocol group group id add remove frame_type frame protocol type protocol no protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identi
210. d to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN awate devices Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol Notes 1 You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 3 153 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch and can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 154 Command Attributes VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Port Port identifier Trunk Trunk identifier 3 151 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Membership Type Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore
211. d to VLAN 1 by default The default frame type is untagged Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage lt A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged e Ifatrunk has switchport mode set to trunk i e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member Frames are always tagged within the switch The tageed untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs the interface should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member Otherwise it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface 4 240 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e Ifa VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5 6 tagged Console config if switchport forbidden vlan This command configures forbidden VLANs Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden V
212. delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4 89 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4 90 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4 91 boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the GC 4 92 system 4 85 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE copy This command moves upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection Syntax copy file file running config startup config tftp copy running config file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config https certificate public key e file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server https certificate Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the switch e public key Keyword that allows you to copy an SSH key Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 86 FLASH FILE COMMAND
213. ds password thresh 4 19 LINE COMMANDS databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax databits 7 8 no databits e 7 Seven data bits per character 8 Eight data bits per character Default Setting 8 data bits per character Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config line databits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 4 22 4 21 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity e even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting Example To specify no parity enter this command Console config line parity none Console config line 4 22 LINE COMMANDS speed This command set
214. e IP Port Number TCP UDP 80 Class of Service Value enh Remove IP Port Figure 3 78 IP Port Priority Mapping CLI The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch maps HTTP traffic on port 1 to CoS value 0 and then displays the IP Port Priority settings Console config map ip port 3 94 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 3 264 Console config if end Console show map ip port ethernet 1 5 3 269 TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 1 80 0 Console Note Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 176 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Mapping CoS Values to ACLs Use the ACL CoS Mapping page to set the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule as shown in the following table Note that the specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues see page 3 165 Table 3 13 CoS to ACL Mapping Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the tule Command Attributes e Port Port identifier Name Name of ACL e Type
215. e 0 64 e Protocol Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP UDP or Others where others indicates a specific protocol number 0 255 Options TCP UDP Others Default TCP Src Dst Port Source destination port number for the specified protocol type Range 0 65535 Src Dst Port Bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 e Control Code Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Control Bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match The control bitmask is a decimal number for an equivalent binary bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 control bitmask 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 control bitmask 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 control bitmask 18 3 65 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 66 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination address
216. e Press lt Enter gt 2 At the interface configuration mode prompt use one of the following commands e To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt e To obtain IP settings via BOOTP type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt 3 Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 4 Type ip dhcp restart client to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt BASIC CONFIGURATION 6 Then save your configuration changes by typing copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart client Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Enabling SNMP Management Access The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as SMC EliteView or HP OpenView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP t
217. e config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if Related Commands switchport mode 4 236 4 237 VLAN COMMANDS switchport ingress filtering This command enables ingress filtering for an interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port Ifingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Example The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if 4 238 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport native vlan 4 239 This command configures the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax swi
218. e config if mac access group M5 out Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console show access list mac mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs Syntax show access list mac mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list mac mask precedence MAC egress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console 4 143 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands mask MAC ACL 4 140 mac access group This command binds a port to a MAC ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax mac access group ac _name in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets e out Indicates that this list applies to egress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one Example Console config interface ethernet 1 25
219. e sec Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Oper Link type Spanning Tree Status Console show spanning tree mst 0 Spanning tree enable disable 20 15 20 20 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 200000 Current root cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec 645 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long Eth 1 1 information Admin status enable Role root State forwarding External path cost 100000 Internal path cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated cost 200000 Designated port 128 24 Designated root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Designated bridge 32768 0 0030F1552000 Fast forwarding disable Forward transitions 1 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port disable Admin Link type auto point to point enable 3 138 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages Field Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 126 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward pac
220. e TCP UDP port mapping globally Console config map ip port Console config map ip port Interface Configuration Use this command to set IP port priority e TCP UDP port priority Use the no form to remove a specific setting Syntax map ip port port number cos cos value no map ip port port number o port number 16 bit TCP UDP port number Range 0 65535 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 4 264 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 Console config if map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 265 This command enables IP precedence mapping i e IP Type of Service Use the no form to disable IP precedence mapping Syntax no map ip precedence Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type
221. e Type Precedence DSCP 802 1p Priority 1 on fe osce o lo Remove 1 lmike macio lo b Remove Figure 3 79 Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules CLI This example changes the DSCP priority for packets matching an IP ACL rule and the 802 1p priority for packets matching a MAC ACL tule Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config if match access list ip bill set dscp 0 32133 Console config if match access list mac mike set priority 0 3 147 Console config if end Console show marking 3 134 Interface ethernet 1 1 match access list IP bill set DSCP 0 match access list MAC a set priority 0 MULTICAST FILTERING Multicast Filtering Multicasting is used to support real time Unicast applications such as videoconferencing yp MOW or streaming audio A multicast server do an does not have to establish a separate C ky connection with each client It merely os broadcasts its service to the network and gt C N 4 N any hosts that want to receive the ER RANA SS multicast register with their local multicast switch router Although this CN Mr nicas approach reduces the network overhead i required by a multicast server the 5 5 broadcast traffic must be carefully Y x pruned at every multicast switch router it A r A S i passes through to ensure that traig is QJ C Le C only passed on to the hosts which subscribed to this service This switch uses IG
222. e a half duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link RSTP only works on point to point links between two bridges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP this same restriction applies Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point spanning tree mst cost This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst nstance_id cost cost no spanning tree mst ustance_id cost e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes cost Path cost for an interface Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 4 224 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Each spanning tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs This command is used by the multiple spanning tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower val
223. e config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 3 286 Console config 3 19 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 20 Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the switch to be dynamically configured by these services Web Click System IP Configuration Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new address Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset IP Configuration Management VLAN fi IP Address Mode DHCP y IP Address 192168154 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1253 MAC Address 00 30 F 1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Figure 3 7 DHCP IP Configuration Note If you lose your management connection use a console connection and enter show ip interface to determine the new switch address BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP address mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart client command Console config Console config interface vlan 1 3 168 Console config if ip address dhcp 3 285 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 3 286 Console show ip interface 3 288 IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console
224. e egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows PAE SA DS User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Setting the ACL Name and Type Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL 3 61 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Command Attributes Name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Type There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 Web Click Security ACL Configuration Enter a
225. e following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 Console config 4 281 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 275 Static Multicast Routing Commands Table 4 51 Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping vlan Adds a multicast router port GC 4 282 mrouter show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports PE 4 283 mrouter ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter This command statically configures a multicast router port Use the no form to remove the configuration Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan 2 an d mrouter interface e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured Command Mode Global Configuration 4 282 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your router you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups Example The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router p
226. e logging of system messages to a remote server or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging Use the no form to disable remote logging Syntax logging trap vel no logging trap level One of the level arguments listed below Messages sent include the selected level up through level 0 Refer to the table on page 4 59 Default Setting Level 3 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config logging trap 4 Console config clear logging This command clears messages from the log buffer Syntax clear logging flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM 4 62 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear logging Console Related Commands show logging 4 63 show logging This command displays the logging configuration along with any system and event messages stored in memory Syntax show logging flash ram sendmail trap e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset e sendmail Displays settings for the SMTP event handler page 4 69 trap Displays s
227. e maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config spanning tree priority This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 211 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 40000 Console config spanning tree pathc
228. e onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above or from a network computer using SNMP network management software Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software Basic Configuration Console Connection 2 4 The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and only allow you to display information and use basic utilities To fully configure the switch parameters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level BASIC CONFIGURATION Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into the CLI at the Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts 2 At the Username prompt enter adm
229. e requires no other configuration settings the switch will obtain time updates from time server broadcasts using the multicast address 224 0 1 1 SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server when set to SNTP Client mode Range 16 16284 seconds Default 16 seconds SNTP Server In unicast mode sets the IP address for up to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence Web Select SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and click Apply SNTP Configuration SNTP Client M Enable SNTP Broadcast client M Enable SNTP Poll Interval 16 16284 16 SNTP Server fioror9 fi3a78s2140 80 128 250 36 2 Figure 3 13 SNTP Configuration CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP broadcast client Console config sntp client 3 73 Console config sntp poll 16 3 72 Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 23 71 Console config tHsntp broadcast client 3 74 Console config BASIC CONFIGURATION Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and
230. e switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can gain access The following exchanges take place during this process 7 The client sends its public key to the switch 8 The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory 4 47 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 9 Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client 10 The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch 11 The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys ip ssh server 4 48 Use this command to enable the Secure Shell SSH server on this switch Use the no form to disable this service Syntax ip ssh server no ip ssh server Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client
231. e time Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the GC 4 278 querier for IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping Configures the query count GC 4 278 query count ip igmp snooping Configures the query interval GC 4 279 query interval ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 4 280 query max response time ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeout GC 4 281 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snooping querier This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping querier Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp snooping querier Console config ip igmp snooping query count This command configures the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default Setting 2 times 4 278 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a
232. ed bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device It then selects a port on the designated bridging device to communicate with each attached LAN or host device as a designated port After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Designated Root gt Ka a x A X 9 Designated X poe ra _ gt Designated Port AO o S y Bridge KA Nay kas X Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower legacy STP RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration i e around one tenth of the time required by STP by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning predefining an alternate ro
233. ed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 Console config mac acl permit any any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 Ef f ff ff ff ff any vid 3 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config Httinterface ethernet 1 12 Console config if mac access group M4 in Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS This example creates an Egress MAC ACL Console config access list mac M5 Console config mac acl deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config access list mac mask precedence out Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Consol
234. eduling weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 for queues 0 through 7 respectively This is the default selection Strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues Web Click Priority Queue Mode Select Strict or WRR then click Apply Queue Mode Queue Mode Wr Figure 3 72 Setting the Queue Mode CLI The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict 3 261 Console config exit Console show queue mode 3 261 Queue mode strict Console 3 167 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 165 the traffic classes are mapped to one of the four egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Command Attributes WRR Setting Table Displays a list of weights for each traffic class i e queue Weight Value Set a new weight for the selected traffic clas
235. egistered Learning may then be disabled again if desired for security Command Usage A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot use port monitoring Cannot be a multi VLAN port It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk It should not be connected to a network interconnection device If a port is disabled shut down due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled from the Port Port Configuration page page 3 84 Command Attributes Port Port number Name Descriptive text page 4 168 Action Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected None No action should be taken This is the default Trap Send an SNMP trap message Shutdown Disable the port Trap and Shutdown Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port Security Status Enables or disables port security on the port Default Disabled Max MAC Count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 20 Trunk Trunk number if port is a member page 3 88 and 3 89 3 49 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Security Port Security Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a port set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port and click Apply Port Security Configuration Port Name Action Security
236. egress checking the bind operation will fail Command Attributes e Port Fixed port or SFP module Range 1 24 IP Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port MAC Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port e IN ACL for ingress packets e OUT ACL for egress packets ACL Name Name of the ACL Web Click Security ACL Port Binding Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for ingress or egress traffic select the required ACL from the drop down list then click Apply ACL Port Binding IP MAC OUT M Enable david T Enable david z M Enable jerry gt F Enable jerry zj M Enable david T Enable david 7 O Enable erry z I Enable jerry z O Enable ery z I Enable jeny z I Enable david y Fr Enable em z I Enable jery z I Enable da vid O Enable erry z F Enable fier 7 I Enable david y O Enable erry z I Enable jeny y Figure 3 34 Mapping ACLs to Port Ingress Egress Queues 3 77 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This examples assigns an IP and MAC ingress ACL to port 1 and an IP ingress ACL to port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config if ip access group david in 3 129 Console config if mac access group jerry in 3 144 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if Htip access group david in Co
237. eighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 for queues 0 7 respectively Default Setting Weighted Round Robin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Example The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict Console config 4 258 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE queue bandwidth This command assigns weighted round robin WRR weights to the eight class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default weights Syntax queue bandwidth wezght1 weight4 no queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 The ratio of weights for queues O 3 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 15 Default Setting Weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 are assigned to queues 0 7 respectively Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channe
238. en placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number IP Precedence bit or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Glossary 1 GLOSSARY Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication standard GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switch
239. ence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device This command is the same as spanning tree edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command may be removed for future software versions Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Spanning tree portfast Console config if Related Commands spanning tree edge port 4 221 spanning tree link type This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no spanning tree link type e auto Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting point to point Point to point link e shared Shared medium SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link whil
240. enting the address bits to match e host Keyword followed by a specific IP address Default Setting None Command Mode Standard ACL Command Usage e New rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned 4 119 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Related Commands access list ip 4 118 permit deny Extended ACL This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses protocol types source or destination protocol ports or TCP control codes Use the no form to remove a tule Syntax no permit deny protoco number udp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence tos tos dscp ds
241. er Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table 3 99 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 100 Web Click Port LACP Port Neighbors Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Neighbors Information Member Port Trunk ID Partner Admin System ID Partner Oper System IO Partner Admin Port Number Partner Oper Port Number Port Admin Priority Port Oper Priority Admin Key Oper Key Admin State Expired Oper State Expired E Admin State Defaulted Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing Oper State Distributing Admin State Collecting Oper State Collecting Admin State Oper State Synchronization Synchronization Admin State Aggregation Oper State Aggregation Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity Figure 3 43
242. er attempts to reauthenticate a user Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh authentication retries count no ip ssh authentication retries count The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset Range 1 5 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip ssh authentication retires 2 Console config Related Commands show ip ssh 4 54 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS ip ssh server key size Use this command to set the SSH server key size Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh server key size key size no ip ssh server key size key size The size of server key Range 512 896 bits Default Setting 768 bits Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch e The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Example Console config ip ssh server key size 512 Console config delete public key Use this command to delete the specified user s public key Syntax delete public key username dsa rsa username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters e dsa DSA public key type e rsa RSA public key type Default Setting Deletes both the DSA and RSA key 4 51 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console delete public ke
243. er a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 4 Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a Web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connection BOOTP or DHCP protocol See Setting an IP Address on page 2 6 2 Set user names and passwords using an out of band serial connection Access to the Web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Setting Passwords on page 2 5 3 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program 3 1 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 2 Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated If you log into the Web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin Edge Port to improve the switch
244. ers that can be configured for this switch as described in the preceding pages including reauth enabled page 4 109 reauth period page 4 110 quiet period page 4 109 tx period page 4 110 and max req page 4 106 It also displays the following global parameters which are set to a fixed value including the following items supp timeout Supplicant timeout server timeout Server timeout reauth max Maximum number of reauthentication attempts 4 111 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 112 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items Status Administrative state for port access control Mode Dotlx port control mode page 4 107 Authorized Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 802 1X Port Details Displays detailed port access control settings for each interface as described in the preceding pages including administrative status for port access control Max request page 4 106 Quiet period page 4 109 Reauth period page 4 110 Tx period page 4 110 and Port control page 4 107 It also displays the following information Status Authorization status authorized or unauthorized Supplicant MAC address of authorized client Authenticator State Machine State Current state including initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorized force_unau
245. es Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as service type protocol type or TCP control code Then click Add Extend ACL Name mike i i A 7 action parkas Sre Mask i ARES TOS preceden psor rane s pat ee Remove Permil10 7 1 0 265 255 255 0 any lany any Any fam e Any Any Any Any Any Jano gt Remove Permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 285 0 Any lany any fany Any 6 Any any feo essas fany fany Remove Src IP p E hase Jeen T Sre SubMask 2552552550 ostie Any Y Dst Address 00 igre SubMask booo Service Type Tos 0 8 Precedence 9 oscp osa Protocol TCP CUDP I7 Others Src Port 0 6553 o sre Port BitMask 0 65535 DstPort 0 55635 Ost Port BitMask 0 65535 Control Code 0 63 2 Control BitMask 0 63 E Aas Figure 3 29 Configuring Extended IP ACLs CLI This example adds three rules 1 Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through 2 Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e
246. es are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Table 3 9 Egress Queue Priority Mapping Queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Priority 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following table However you can map the priority levels to the switch s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network Table 3 10 CoS Priority Levels Priority Level Trafic Type 1 Background 2 Spate 0 default Best Effort 3 Excellent Effort 4 Controlled Load 5 Video less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter 6 Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter 7 Network Control Command Attributes Priority CoS value Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest priority e Traffic Class Output queue buffer Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest CoS priority queue CLI shows Queue ID 3 165 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Mark an interface and click Select to display the current mapping of CoS values to output queues Assign priorities to the traffic classes i e output queues for the selected interface then click Apply Traffic Classes Priority Traffic Class o ik e 1 fp 2 b on 3 B 07 4
247. es for individual ports e 802 1x Use IEEE 802 1x port authentication to control access to specific ports Configuring the Logon Password The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a safe place The default guest name is guest with the password guest The default administrator name is admin with the password admin Note that user names can only be assigned via the CLI Command Attributes User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters e Access Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged e Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive CLI only 3 33 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Security Passwords To change the password for the current user enter the old password the new password confirm it by entering it again then click Apply Passwords Old Password ras New Password coer Confirm Password e Figure 3 17 Configuring the Logon Password CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 1 e administrator then specify the password Console config username bob access level 15 3 35 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config Conf
248. es to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol Glossary 2 GLOSSARY IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Taggine Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transm
249. ess es for the SNMP group Telnet IP Filter Configures IP address es for the Telnet group IP Filter List IP address which are allowed management access to this interface Start IP Address A single IP address or the starting address of a range End IP Address The end address of a range Web Click Security IP Filter Enter the addresses that are allowed management access to an interface and click Add IP Filtering Entry Telnet IP Filter 192 168 1 19192 168 1 19 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Telnet IP Filter List Start IP NA Address End IP Address Add Telnet IP Filtering Entry Remove Telnet IP Filtering Entry zi Figure 3 35 Filtering Management Access CLI This example restricts management access for Telnet clients Console config management telnet client 192 168 1 19 3 38 Console Console config management telnet client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 3 79 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status 3 80 You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status including link state speed duplex mode flow control and auto negotiation Field Attributes Web Name Interface label Type Indicates the port type 1000BASE T 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX or 100BASE FX Admin Status Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled Oper Status Indicate
250. ess group Adds a port to a MAC ACL IC 4 144 show mac Shows port assignments for MAC PE 4 145 access gtoup ACLs map access list mac Sets the CoS value and IC 4 145 corresponding output queue for packets matching an ACL rule show map access list Shows CoS value mapped to an PE 4 146 mac access list for an interface match access list mac Changes the 802 1p priority the IC 4 147 priority of a frame matching the defined rule i e also called packet marking show marking Displays the current configuration PE 4 134 for packet marking 4 135 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE access list mac This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list mac ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An egress ACL must contain all deny rules When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one tule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list mac jerry Console config mac acl Related Commands permit deny 4 137 mac ac
251. ess will be ignored and will not be written to the address table 3 112 ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS Command Attributes Static Address Counts The number of manually configured addresses Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses Interface Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Web Only Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Static Addresses Static Address Counts 00 E0 29 94 34 DE VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Permanent Current Static Address Table Interface Port 1 lC Trunk MAC Address gt VLAN 1 y Add Static Address Remove Static Address Figure 3 49 Mapping Ports to Static Addresses CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 3 201 Console config 3 113 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that addres
252. estore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan v an id name vlan name media ethernet state active suspend no vlan v an id name state vlan id ID of configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters e media ethernet Ethernet media type state Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage no vlan v an id deletes the VLAN no vlan v an id name removes the VLAN name e no vlan v an id state returns the VLAN to the default state i e active e You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch 4 233 VLAN COMMANDS Example The following example adds a VLAN using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5 The VLAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan tvlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 242 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Table 4 40 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Command Function Mode Page interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode for IC 4 235 a specified VLAN switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode IC 4 236 for an interface switchport Conf
253. ets the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before utc after utc name Name of timezone usually an acronym Range 1 29 characters bours Number of hours before after UTC Range 1 12 hours minutes Number of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes before utc Sets the local time zone before east of UTC after utc Sets the local time zone after west of UTC Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 4 74 4 75 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE calendar set This command sets the system clock It may be used if there is no time server on your network or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server Syntax calendar set hour min sec day month year month day year bour Hour in 24 hour format Range 0 23 e min Minute Range 0 59 e sec Second Range O 59 day Day of mo
254. ettings for the trap function Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors 1 e default level 3 0 the message level for RAM is debugging 1 e default level 7 0 and lists one sample error 4 63 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 64 Syslog Syslog Console show logging flash ogging Enable History logging in FLASH level errors 0 0 0 5 1 1 1 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails level 3 module 13 function 0 and event no 0 Console show logging ram ogging Enable History logging in RAM level debugging 0 0 0 5 1 1 1 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails level 3 module 13 function 0 and event no 0 Console Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command History logging in The message level s reported based on the logging history FLASH command History logging in The message level s reported based on the logging history RAM command Messages Any system and event messages stored in memory The following example displays settings for the trap function Console show logging trap Syslog logging Enable REMOTELOG status disable REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Debugging messages REMOTELOG server IP address 1 2 3 4 RE
255. exit Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode Dhcp Console Related Commands ip address 4 285 ip default gateway 4 287 This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist on another network segment Use the no form to remove the static route Syntax ip default gateway gateway no ip default gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment Example The following example defines a default gateway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 1 254 Console config IP INTEREACE COMMANDS Related Commands show ip redirects 4 288 show ip interface This command displays the settings of an IP interface Default Setting All interfaces Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console Related Commands show ip redirects 4 288 show ip redirects This command shows the default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects ip default gatewa
256. f spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst cost 4 224 4 226 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree protocol migration This command re checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration ot Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces i e RSTP or STP compatible Example Console spanning tree protocol migration eth 1 5 Console 4 227 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS show spanning tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree CST or for an instance within the multiple spanning tree MST Syntax show spanning tree interface mst instance_id interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 instance_id Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree Range 0 64 no leading zeroes Default Setting None
257. f service using four priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be prioritized based on the priority bits in the IP frame Type of Service ToS octet When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Multicast Filtering Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee real time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration System Defaults SYSTEM DEFAULTS The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Default_Config cfg To reset the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file page 3 25 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parametet Default Console Port Baud Rate auto Connection Data bits 8 Stop bits il P
258. face vlan 1 1 end Console The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer config Console 2 Console config Console config reload This command restarts the system Note When the system is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command 4 29 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command resets the entire system Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y end This command returns to Privileged Exec mode Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console 4 30 exit quit GENERAL COMMANDS This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the
259. ferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 8 Port Statistics Parameter Description Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Received Frames The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address CRC Alignment Errors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersize Frames The total number of frames received th
260. fier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 frame Frame type used by this protocol Options ethernet rfc_1042 snap_8021h snap_other Ilc_other protocol Protocol type The only option for the llc_other frame type is ipx_raw The options for all other frames types include ip arp tarp Default Setting No protocol groups are configured Command Mode Global Configuration 4 244 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following creates protocol group 1 and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame_type ethernet protocol type ip Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces This command maps a protocol group to a VLAN for the current interface Use the no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface Syntax protocol vlan protocol group group id vlan vlan id no protocol vlan protocol group group id vlan group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 vlan id VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 Default Setting No protocol groups are mapped for any interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces via this command If you
261. figures SMTP email alerts 4 65 Time System Sets the system clock automatically via NIP SNTP 4 70 Clock server or manually System Status Displays system configuration active managers and 4 77 version information Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames 4 84 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Device Designation Commands Table 4 8 Device Designation Commands prompt Command Function Mode Page prompt Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE GC 4 33 mode hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4 34 snmp server Sets the system contact string GC 4 151 contact snmp server Sets the system location string GC 4 151 location This command customizes the CLI prompt Use the no form to restore the default prompt Syntax prompt string no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting Console Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config prompt RD2 RD2 config 4 33 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config hostname RD 1 Console config User Access Commands 4 34 T
262. figures a mirror session Use the no form to clear a mirror session Syntax port monitor nterface rx tx both no port monitor interface e interface ethernet unit port source port unit Switch unit 1 port Port number e rx Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets both Mirror both received and transmitted packets Default Setting No mirror session is defined When enabled the default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet destination port 4 183 MIRROR Port COMMANDS Command Usage e You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port e You can create multiple mirror sessions but all sessions must share the same destination port However you should avoid sending too much traffic to the destination port from multiple source ports Example The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 both Console confi
263. figures per port security including 3 48 status response for security breach and maximum allowed MAC addresses 802 1x Port authentication 3 104 Information Displays global configuration settings 3 52 Configuration Configures protocol parameters 3 55 Port Configuration Sets the authentication mode for individual 3 56 ports Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected 3 58 port ACL 3 60 Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or 3 60 MAC addresses Mask Configuration Controls the order in which ACL rules are 3 70 checked Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3 76 IP Filter Sets IP addresses of clients allowed 3 78 management access Port 3 78 Port Information Displays port connection status 3 80 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3 80 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 84 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3 84 Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3 88 NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page LACP 3 89 Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3 89 Aggregation Port Configures system priority admin key and 3 91 port priority Port Counters Displays statistics for LACP protocol 3 94 Information messages Port Internal Displays settings and operational state for 3 96 Information local side Por
264. filtering for unicast and multicast addresses Refer to Setting Static Addresses on page 3 112 VLAN Learning This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning IVL where each port maintains its own filtering database Configurable PVID Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 3 141 Local VLAN Capable This switch supports multiple local bridges i e multiple spanning trees Refer to Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees on page 3 133 GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System Bridge Extension Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning IVL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No GMRP I Enable Figure 3 5 Bridge Extension Configuration CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 3 251 Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Co
265. forwarding Tf two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree Designated Port The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto detection as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3 130 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3 130 Le true or false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received indicating that another bridge is attached to this port 3 127 CONFI
266. g GVRP status and GARP timers Command Usage GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network GARP Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GVRP registration deregistration VLAN CONFIGURATION Command Attributes PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group Acceptable Frame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Option All Tagged Default All Ingress Filtering Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Default Disabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames
267. g Private VLANs Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable disable the Private VLAN function Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Status Select Enable or Disable from the scroll down box and click Apply Private VLAN Status Private VLAN Status Enabled y zi Figure 3 66 Enabling Private VLANS CLI This example enables private VLANs Console config pvlan 3 248 Console config VLAN CONFIGURATION Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports Use the Private VLAN Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the switch except for the uplink ports Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports on the switch and with any designated downlink ports Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Link Status Mark the ports that will serve as uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN then click Apply Private VLAN Link Status Port Uplink Downlink None Trunk Member 1 C O Ce 2 C c G 3 E C O 4 Ce O C 5 G C 6 C E c 7 O G si Figure 3 67 PVLAN Uplink Downlink Port Configuration CLI This configures ports 3 and 4 as uplinks and ports 5 and 6 as downlinks Console config H Hpvlan uplink 1 3 4 downlink 1 5 6 3 248 Console config Configuring Protocol Based VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may requi
268. g if show port monitor This command displays mirror information Syntax show port monitor nterface interface ethernet unit port source port unit Switch unit 1 port Port number Default Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 184 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port destination port and mirror mode i e RX TX RX TX Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination port listen port Eth1 1 Source port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX TX Console Rate Limit Commands 4 185 This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Tab
269. g vlan static This command adds a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan viun id static p address interface e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 ip address IP address for multicast group interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config 4 274 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip igmp snooping version This command configures the IGMP snooping version Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 no ip igmp snooping version e 1 IGMP Version 1 2 IGMP Version 2 Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 including ip igmp query max response time and ip igmp query timeout Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config 4 275 MULTICAST FILTERING
270. gorithm Configuration 0 000 00 3 116 Displaying Global Settings ooooooocccoooormmm 3 117 Configuring Global Settings 0 cece eee eee 3 121 Displaying Interface Settings 0 00 cece eee 3 126 Configuring Interface Settings suus eee eee eee eee 3 130 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees ooooooooomoo 3 133 Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP 3 137 Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP 3 139 VLAN Configuration a asip peee a E AA RE eens 3 141 Overview dd ES at da RA 3 141 Assigning Ports to VLANS ooooooocccccoooooo 3 142 Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames 3 145 Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting 3 146 Displaying Basic VLAN Information 00 3 146 Displaying Current VLANs 0 000 c cece eee eee 3 147 Creating VLANS sissies te owed Getta aaa ea as 3 149 Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index 3 151 CONTENTS vi Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index 3 153 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3 154 Configuring Private VLANs 0 00 c eee eee eee 3 158 Enabling Private VLANs 000 e eee eee ee 3 158 Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports 3 159 Configuring Protocol Based VLANs 0 0 00005 3 159 Configuring Protocol Groups 000 eee 3 160 Mapping Protocols to VLANs 00 00000008
271. h Cost Method long Eth 1 1 information Admin status enable Role root State forwarding External path cost 100000 Internal path cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated cost 200000 Designated port 128 24 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 32768 0 0030F1552000 Fast forwarding disable Forward transitions 1 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port disable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enable 4 229 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS show spanning tree mst configuration This command shows the multiple spanning tree configuration Syntax show spanning tree mst configuration Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show spanning tree mst configuration Mstp Configuration Information Configuration name XSTP REGION 0 Revision level 0 Instance Vlans Console 4 230 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE VLAN Commands A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Table 4 38 VLAN Commands Command Groups Function Page Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and 4 231 state Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters 4 234 Interfaces incl
272. has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address default gateway and subnet mask e You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart command or by rebooting the switch 4 285 IP INTERFACE COMMANDS Note Before you can change the IP address you must first clear the current address with the no form of this command Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config 1f Related Commands ip dhcp restart 4 286 ip dhcp restart This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if available If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain 4 286 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example In the following example the device is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if
273. hat the management station supports If the snmp server host command does not specify the SNMP version the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications Example Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman Console config Related Commands snmp enable traps 4 154 4 153 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE snmp enable traps This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps SNMP notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications Syntax no snmp enable traps authentication link up down e authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure traps link up down Keyword to issue link up or link down traps The link up down trap can only be enabled disabled via the CLI Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Ifyou do not enter an snmp enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp enable traps command If you enter the command with no keywords both authentication and link up down notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled The snmp enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp server host command Use the snmp host command to specify which host or hosts rece
274. he Input Rate Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status then set the rate limit for the individual interfaces and click Apply Output Rate Limit Port Configuration Port Output Rate Limit Status Output Rate Limit Mbps Trunk 1 Enabled y 0 TEEPE Disabled y 000 Disabled 000 Disabled y 000 Disabled y 000 000 Disabled y Disabled 000 Disabled 000 Disabled y 000 000 y Figure 3 46 Configuring Output Port Rate Limiting AA Disabled v CLI This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through port 1 to 600 Mbps Console config tinterface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config if rate limit input 600 3 186 Console config if rate limit output 600 Console config if 3 105 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Showing Port Statistics 3 106 You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet like MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port All values displa
275. he basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a Telnet connection page 4 14 user authentication v a a remote authentication server page 4 93 and host access authentication for specific ports page 4 104 Table 4 9 User Access Commands Command Function Mode Page username Establishes a user name based authentication GC 4 35 system at login enable password Sets a password to control access to the GC 4 36 Privileged Exec level username SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS This command adds named users requires authentication at login specifies or changes a user s password or specify that no password is required or specifies or changes a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username name access level level no password password 0 7 password no username ame name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 access level eve Specifies the user level The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopassword No password is required for this user to log in 0 7 O means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sens
276. henever an invalid community string is submitted during the SNMP access authentication process The default is enabled Enable Link up and Link down Traps Issues link up or link down traps The default is enabled Web Click SNMP Configuration Fill in the IP address and community string for each trap manager that will receive these messages specify the SNMP version mark the trap types required and then click Add Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current New none Trap Manager IP address 192 168 1 19 lt lt Add Trap Manager Community String private Remove Trap Version 2c Enable Authentication Traps Vv Enable Link up and Link down Traps V Figure 3 16 Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication and link up link down traps Console config Hksnmp server host 192 168 1 19 private version 2c3 152 Console config snmp server enable traps 3 154 USER AUTHENTICATION User Authentication You can restrict management access to this switch using the following options e Passwords Manually configure access rights on the switch for specified users e Authentication Settings Use remote authentication to configure access rights HTTPS Settings Provide a secure web connection SSH Settings Provide a secure shell for secure Telnet access e Port Security Configure secure address
277. host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys 2 The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions Generating the Host Key Pair A host public private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch After generating this key pair you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client s public key to the switch as described in the proceeding section Command Usage 3 43 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 44 Field Attributes Public Key of Host Key The public key for the host RSA The first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 65537 and the last string is the encoded modulus DSA The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS The last string is the encoded modulus Host Key Type The key type used to generate the host key pair Le public and private keys Range RSA DSA Both Default RSA The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Saves the host key from RAM i e volatile memory to f
278. ibility with other devices on the network Range 1 2 Default 2 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings as required and then click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration IGMP Status M Enable Act as IGMP Querier M Enable GMP Query Count 2 10 e IGMP Query Interval 60 125 fiz seconds GMP Report Delay 5 30 fio seconds IGMP Query Timeout 300 500 Bo seconds GMP Version 1 2 2 Figure 3 80 Configuring Internet Group Management Protocol CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console config ip igmp snooping 3 273 Console config ip igmp snooping querier 3 278 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 3 278 Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 3 279 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 3 280 Console config ip igmp snooping query time out 300 3 281 Console config ip igmp snooping version 2 3 275 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping 3 276 Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count 10 Query interval 100 sec Query max response time 20 sec Router port expire time 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console
279. id Range 1 6 4 262 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example COMMAND LINE INTERFACE CoS Value Console Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 20 4 22 Priority Queue Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Table 4 47 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map ip port Enables TCP UDP class of service GC 4 264 mapping map ip port Maps TCP UDP socket to a class of IC 4 264 service map ip precedence Enables IP precedence class of service GC 4 265 mapping map ip precedence Maps IP precedence value to a class of IC 4 266 service map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service GC 4 267 mapping map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4 268 show map ip port Shows the IP port map PE 4 269 show map ip Shows the IP precedence map PE 4 270 precedence show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4 271 PRIORITY COMMANDS map ip port Global Configuration Use this command to enable IP port mapping i e class of service mapping for TCP UDP sockets Use the no form to disable IP port mapping Syntax map ip port no map ip port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority Example The following example shows how to enabl
280. identity information RADIUS Y oe 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server 5 Authentication server challenges client 6 Client responds with proper credentials 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client access to this port server The operation of 802 1x on the switch requires the following The switch must have an IP address assigned RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the RADIUS server specified Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1x Auto mode Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client software installed and properly configured The RADIUS server and 802 1x client support EAP The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type The current version of the firmware supports only the EAP MD5 authetication type Some clients have native support in Windows otherwise the dot1x client must support it Displaying 802 1x Global Settings The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication process that runs between the client and the switch 1 e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section USER AUTHENTICATION Command Att
281. ient 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console show management This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Syntax show management all client http client snmp client telnet client e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP Web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the Web group e snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group Command Mode Global Configuration 4 39 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Http Client 1 192 168 1 19 25 192 416 8 1 25 Snmp Client 1 192 168 1 19 2 192 1 68 1 25 Telnet Client 1 192 168 1 19 Zw 1924 16 87 1 25 Console Console show management all client Management Ip Filter Start ip address End ip address 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 30 Start ip address End ip address 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 30 Start ip address End ip address 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 30 Web Server Commands 4 40 Table 4 11 Web Server Command Command Function Mode Page ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the Web GC 4 41 browser interface ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or GC 4 41 configured from a browser ip http Enables HTTPS SSL for encrypted GC 4 42 secute server communications ip http secure port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC 4 44
282. ig spanning tree mode mst 3 207 Console config spanning tree priority 40000 3 211 Console config spanning tree hello time 5 3 210 Console config spanning tree max age 38 3 210 Console config spanning tree forward time 20 3 209 Console config kspanning tree pathcost method long 3 212 Console config Hkspanning tree transmission limit 4 3 213 Console config Console config spanning tree mst configuration 3 213 Console config mstp Hrevision 1 3 217 Console config mstp name R amp D 3 216 Console config mstp max hops 30 3 218 Console config mstp Displaying Interface Settings 3 126 The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Field Attributes Spanning Tree Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface STA Status Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION The rules defining port status are A porton a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always
283. igures frame types to be accepted IC 4 237 acceptable frame types by an interface switchport Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4 238 ingress filtering switchport native vlan Configures the PVID native VLAN of IC 4 239 an interface switchport allowed Configures the VLANs associated with IC 4 240 vlan an interface switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 252 switchport forbidden Configures forbidden VLANs for an IC 4 241 vlan interface 4 234 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE interface vlan 4 235 This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface Syntax interface vlan v an id vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands shutdown 4 175 VLAN COMMANDS switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport mode trunk hybrid no switchport mode trunk Specifies a port as an end point fora VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link
284. iguring Local Remote Logon Authentication 3 34 Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS or TACACS protocols a 13 Web console Telnet EA 1 Client attempts management access 2 Switch contacts authentication server RADIUS 3 Authentication server challenges client TACACS 4 Client responds with proper password or key 5 Authentication server approves access server r 6 Switch grants management access USER AUTHENTICATION Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS and Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet Command Usage
285. imary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads Glossary 7 GLOSSARY User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 8 Numerics 802 1x port authentication 4 104 A acceptable frame type 3 155 4 237 Access Control List See ACL ACL Extended IP 3 62 4 114 4 116 4 120 MAC 3 62 4 114 4 135 4 136 4 139 Standard IP 3 62 4 114 4 116 4 119 address table 3 112 4 200 aging time 3 115 4 204 B BOOTP 3 20 4 285 BPDU 3 117 broadcast storm threshold 3 101 4 176 C Class of Service See CoS CLI showing commands 4 6 co
286. ime an aggregate link is established with the partner 4 195 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 show lacp This command displays LACP information Syntax show lacp port channel counters internal neighbors sys id e port channel Local identifier for a link aggregation group Range 1 6 counters Statistics for LACP protocol messages internal Configuration settings and operational state for local side neighbors Configuration settings and operational state for remote side sys id Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups Default Setting Port Channel all Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show lacp 1 counters Channel group 1 LACPDUs Sent 21 LACPDUs Received 21 Marker Sent 0 Marker Received 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 4 196 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 197 Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Unknown Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Pkts Protocols Ethernet Ty
287. ime out General Basic commands for entering privileged access 4 26 mode restarting the system or quitting the CLI System Management Controls system logs system passwords user 4 32 name browser management options and a variety of other system information Flash File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4 85 Authentication Configures logon access using local or remote 4 93 authentication also configures port security and IEEE 802 1x port access control Access Control List Provides filtering for IP frames based on address 4 114 COMMAND GROUPS Table 4 4 Command Group Index Command Group SNMP Interface Description Activates authentication failure traps configures community access strings and trap managers also configures IP address filtering Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports aggregated links and VLANs Page 4 167 Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data passing through or the performance of the monitored port 4 183 Rate Limiting Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4 185 Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk configures Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses displays current entries clears the table or sets the aging
288. in 3 At the Password prompt also enter admin The password characters are not displayed on the console screen 4 The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwords for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privileged Exec level 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt 3 Type username guest password 0 password for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 2 5 INITLAL CONFIGURATION Type username admin password 0 password for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Username admin Password CLI session is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure Console config username guest password 0 password Console config username admin password 0 password Console config Setting an IP Address 2 6 You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain
289. in key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group e Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner 4 193 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp admin key Port Channel This command configures a port channel s LACP administration key string Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp admin key key no lacp admin key key The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group LAG during local LACP setup on this switch Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Port Channel Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has
290. ing editing keystrokes for command line processing Table 4 3 Keystroke Commands Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Cttl B Shifts cutsor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl P Enters the last command 4 11 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 3 Keystroke Commands Keystroke Function Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command Command Groups 4 12 The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below Table 4 4 Command Group Index protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type Command Group Description Page Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port 4 14 and Telnet including baud rate and console t
291. ion 3 133 4 227 transmission limit 3 124 4 213 standards IEEE A 3 startup files creating 3 25 4 86 displaying 3 22 4 77 setting 3 22 4 92 static addresses setting 3 112 4 201 statistics port 3 106 4 179 STP 3 122 4 207 STP Aso see STA system clock setting 3 27 4 70 system software downloading from server 3 22 4 86 T TACACS logon authentication 3 35 4 99 time setting 3 27 4 70 traffic class weights 3 168 4 259 trap manager 2 11 3 31 4 152 troubleshooting B 1 trunk configuration 3 86 4 187 LACP 3 89 4 190 static 3 88 4 189 Index 4 U upgrading software 3 22 4 86 user password 3 33 4 35 4 36 V VLANs 3 141 3 159 4 231 4 249 adding static members 3 151 3 153 4 240 creating 3 149 4 233 description 3 141 displaying basic information 3 146 4 251 displaying port members 3 147 4 242 egress mode 3 156 4 236 interface configuration 3 154 4 237 4 241 private 3 158 4 248 protocol 3 159 4 243 W Web interface access requirements 3 1 configuration buttons 3 4 home page 3 3 menu list 3 4 3 5 panel display 3 4 FOR TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALL From U S A and Canada 24 hours a day 7 days a week 800 SMC 4 YOU Phn 949 679 8000 Fax 949 679 1481 From Europe Contact details can be found on www smc europe com or www smc com INTERNET E mail addresses techsupport smc com european techsupport smc europe com Driver updates http www smc com index
292. ion state Values Negotiation Started Authentication Started Session Statted Username The user name of the client 4 55 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 13 SSH Information Field Encryption Description The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server Options for SSHv1 5 include DES 3DES Options for SSHv2 0 can include different algorithms for the client to server ctos and server to client stoc aes128 cbc hmac shal aes192 cbc hmac shal aes256 cbc hmac shal 3des cbc hmac shal blowfish cbc hmac sha1 aes128 cbc hmac md5 aes192 cbc hmac md5 aes256 cbc hmac md5 3des cbc hmac md5 blowfish cbc hmac md5 Encryption Terminology DES Data Encryption Standard 56 bit key 3DES Triple DES Uses three iterations of DES 112 bit key aes Advanced Encryption Standard 160 or 224 bit key blowfish Blowfish 32 448 bit key cbc cypher block chaining shal Secure Hash Algorithm 1 160 bit hashes md5 Message Digest algorithm number 5 128 bit hashes show public key Use this command to show the public key for the specified user or for the host Syntax show public key user username host username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters 4 56 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Default Setting Shows all public keys Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Ifno parameters are entered all keys
293. ip mask precedence IP ingress mask ACL mask host any mask 255 255 255 0 any Console Related Commands mask IP ACL 4 125 ip access group This command binds a port to an IP ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip access group acl_name in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets e out Indicates that this list applies to egress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port 4 129 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config int eth 1 25 Console config if ip access group standard david in Console config if Related Commands show ip access list 4 123 show ip access group This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP standard access list david Console Related Commands ip access group 4 129 map access list ip This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is
294. is port multi host Allows multiple host to connect to this port max count Keyword for the maximum number of hosts count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port Range 1 20 Default 5 Default Single host Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx operation mode multi host max count 10 Console config if dotix re authenticate This command forces re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dotlx re authenticate nterface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number 4 108 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Consolefdot1x re authenticate Console dotl1x re authentication This command enables periodic re authentication globally for all ports Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax no dotix re authentication Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx re authentication Console config dotlx timeout quiet period This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form to reset the default Syntax dotlx timeout quiet period seconds no dotlx timeout quiet period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 60 seconds 4 109 COMMAN
295. isplayed items Example Console show bridge ext Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable Yes Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS switchport gvrp This command enables GVRP for a port Use the no form to disable it Syntax no switchport gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config 1f show gvrp configuration This command shows if GVRP is enabled Syntax show gvrp configuration nterface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows both global and interface specific configuration Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 252 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show gvrp configuration ethernet 1 7 Eth 1 7 Gvrp configuration Enabled Console garp timer This command sets the values for the join leave and leaveall timers Use the no form to restore the timers default values Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall smer_value no garp timer join leave leaveal
296. it packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1s An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP which provides independent spanning trees for VLAN groups IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members Glossary 3 GLOSSARY IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereb
297. itive Default Setting The default access level is Normal Exec The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin Command Mode Global Configuration 4 35 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user Console config username bob access level 15 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config enable password After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec password Remember to record it in a safe place This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax enable password level ve 0 7 password no enable password level eve e level ve Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14 are not used e 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password e password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The defaul
298. ive SNMP notifications In order to send notifications you must configure at least one snmp host command Example Console config snmp enable traps link up down Console config 4 154 SNMP CoMMANDS Related Commands snmp host 4 152 show snmp This command checks the status of SNMP communications Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp enable traps command 4 155 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 156 Example Console show snmp System Contact Paul System Location WC 19 SNMP traps Authentication enable Link up down enable SNMP communities 1 alpha and the privilege is read write 2 private and the privilege is read write 3 public and the privilege is read only 328 SNMP packets input 0 Bad SNMP version errors 0 Unknown community name 0 Illegal operation for community name supplied 0 Encoding errors 557 Number of requested variables 0 Number of altered variables 99 Get request PDUs 229 Get next PDUs 0 Set request PDUs 328 SNMP packets output 0 Too big errors 0 No such name errors 0 Bad values errors 0 General errors 328 Response PDUs 0 Trap PDUs SNMP logging enabled Logging to 10 1 19 23 batman version 1 Console DNS COMMANDS
299. kets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured e MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 57 Default 0 Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority 1 e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 3 139 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH MST Path Cost This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maxi
300. l join leave leaveall Which timer to set e timer_value Value of timer Ranges join 20 1000 centiseconds leave 60 3000 centiseconds leaveall 500 18000 centiseconds Default Setting e join 20 centiseconds e leave 60 centiseconds e leaveall 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration deregistration 4 253 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs Timer values must meet the following restrictions leave gt 2 x join leaveall gt leave Note Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values Otherwise GVRP may not operate successfully Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if garp timer join 100 Console config if Related Commands show gatp timer 4 254 show garp timer This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface Syntax show garp timer interface interface ethernet wit port unit This is device 1 port Port number
301. l Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights Example This example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues for port 5 Console con Console config ttint eth 1 5 Console config if queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Console config if Related Commands show queue bandwidth 4 262 4 259 PRIORITY COMMANDS queue cos map This command assigns class of service CoS values to the priority queues 1 e hardware output queues 0 7 Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map gueue_id cos cosn no queue cos map e quene_id The ID of the priority queue Ranges are 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority queue cos cosn The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID It is a space separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority Default Setting This switch supports Class of Service by using eight priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown below Queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Priority 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e CoS values assigned at the
302. lash memory Otherwise the host key pair is stored to RAM by default Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host key pair Generate This button is used to generate the host key pair Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page USER AUTHENTICATION Web Click Security SSH Host Key Settings Select the host key type from the drop down box select the option to save the host key from memory to flash if required prior to generating the key and then click Generate SSH Host Key Settings Public Key of Host Key Host Key Type Both ere F Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Genero ee Figure 3 20 SSH Host Key Settings 3 45 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 46 CLI This example generates a host key pair using both the RSA and DSA algorithms stores the keys to flash memory and then displays the host s public keys Console ip ssh crypto host key generate 3 48 Console ip ssh save host key 3 48 Console show public key host 3 48 Host RSA 1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761 8240969094744832010252487896597759216832222558465238779154647980739 6314033869257931051057652122430528078658854857892726029378660892368 4142327591212760325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511 72929051081391964202519093210432857904576489
303. le mac address table aging time 4 203 This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac address table aging time seconds no mac address table aging time seconds Aging time Range 10 1000000 seconds 0 to disable aging ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information Example Console config mac address table aging time 100 Console config show mac address table aging time This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 300 sec Console 4 204 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Spanning Tree Commands This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface Table 4 37 Spanning Tree Commands hops allowed in the region before a BPDU is discarded Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4 206 spanning tree mode Configures STP RSTP or MSTP mode GC 4 207 spanning tree Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 209 forw
304. le Console config boot system config startup Console config Related Commands dir 4 90 whichboot 4 91 Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods You can also enable port based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802 1x Table 4 20 Authentication Commands Command Group Function Page Authentication Defines logon authentication method and 4 93 Sequence precedence RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a 4 95 RADIUS server TACACS Client Configures settings for authentication via a 4 99 TACACS server Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port 4 102 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports 4 104 using 802 1x Authentication Sequence Table 4 21 Authentication Sequence Command Function Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method GC 4 94 and precedence 4 93 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE authentication login 4 94 This command defines the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius tacacs no authentication login e local Use local password e radius Use RADIUS server password e tacacs Use TACACS server password Defa
305. le 4 34 Rate Limit Commands Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input or output IC 4 186 rate for a port Rate LIMIT COMMANDS rate limit This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit input output raze no rate limit input output input Input rate output Output rate rate Maximum value in Mbps Range 1 to 1000 Mbps Default Setting 1000 Mbps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config tinterface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit input 600 Console config if 4 186 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Link Aggregation Commands 4 187 Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link i e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP This switch supports up to six trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps
306. leged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode 4 27 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 4 26 configure This command activates Global Configuration mode You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console configure Console config Related Commands end 4 30 show history This command shows the contents of the command history buffer Default Setting None 4 28 GENERAL COMMANDS Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer Console show history Execution command history 2 config 1 show history Configuration command history 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 inter
307. list mac This command shows the CoS value mapped to a MAC ACL for the current interface The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule Syntax show map access list mac 2 1erface interface ethernet wnit port e unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 146 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Example Console show map access list mac Access list to COS of Eth 1 5 Access list M5 cos 0 Console Related Commands map access list mac 4 145 match access list mac This command changes the IEEE 802 1p priority of a Layer 2 frame matching the defined ACL rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking Use the no form to remove the ACL marker Syntax match access list mac ac _name set priority priority no match access list mac ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities based on an ACL rule Example Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if match access list mac a set priority 0 Console config if 4 147 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ACL show 4 148 Related Commands show marking 4 134 I
308. lnet When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered Notes 1 Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol 2 The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 Command Usage The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified on the Authentication Settings page page 3 34 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch SSH Host Key Settings and enable the SSH server Authentication Settings 3 41 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 42 To use the SSH server complete these steps Generate a Host Key Pair On the SSH Host Key Settings page create a host public private key pair
309. logging sendmail destination email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages However you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient 4 68 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no logging sendmail Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config logging sendmail Console config show logging sendmail This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 69 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example SMTP servers 192 168 119 Console Console show logging sendmail SMTP minimum severity level 7 SMTP destination email addresses ted this company com SMTP source email address bill this company com SMTP status Enable Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers NTP or SNTP or by using information broadcast by local time servers Table 4 16 Time Commands Command Function Mode Page sntp server Spe
310. lt 300 seconds Web Click Address Table Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Time 10 1000000 400 seconds x Figure 3 51 Setting the Aging Time CLI This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 400 3 203 Console config 3 115 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 116 The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STA compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device It selects a designat
311. ly received EAPOL frame USER AUTHENTICATION Table 3 4 802 1x Statistics Parameter Descripton Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Id The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Web Select Security 802 1X Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics 802 1X Statistics Query Rx EXPOL Start O Rx EAP LenError 0 Rx EAPOL Logoff O Rx Last EAPOLVer 0 Rx EAPOL Invalid O Rx Last EAPOLSrc 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rx EAPOL Total OJTx EAPOL Total ot Rx EAP Resp ld O Tx EAP Req ld 0 Rx EAP Resp Oth O Tx EAP Req Oth 0 Refresh Figure 3 26 802 1x Statistics 3 59 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example displays the 802 1x statistics for port 4 Console show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1 4 3 111 Eth 1 4 Rx EXPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp Id Resp Oth LenError 2 0 0 1007 672 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc dt 00 00 E8 98 73 21 Tx EAPOL EAP EAP Total Req Id Reg Oth 2017 1005 0 Console Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address proto
312. ly configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure any number of ports on the switch as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them If an LACP trunk consists of more than eight ports all other ports will be placed in a standby mode Should one link in the trunk fail one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails However before making any physical connections between devices use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take note of the following points e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop e You can create up to six trunks on the switch with up to eight ports per trunk The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports When configuring static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco E
313. m entering the network and wasting bandwidth DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the switch provides 1 MB for frame buffering This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Protocol The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D This protocol adds a level of fault tolerance by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between a pair of LAN segments When there are multiple physical paths between segments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STP but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s This protocol is a direct extension of RSTP It can provide an independent spanning tree for different V
314. management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch you will also need to specify the default gateway router Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network Manual Configuration You can manually assign an 1P address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations on another network segment Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers O to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Note The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default BASIC CONFIGURATION Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network administrator e IP address for the switch e Default gateway for the network Network mask for this network To assign an IP address to the switch complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address p address netmask IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt
315. mand Function Mode Page bridge ext gvrp Enables GVRP globally for the GC 4 250 switch show bridge ext Shows the global bridge extension PE 4 251 configuration switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 252 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for IC 4 241 an interface show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for NE 4 252 the selected interface PE garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the IC 4 253 selected function show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the NE 4 254 selected function PE bridge ext gvrp This command enables GVRP globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no bridge ext gvrp Default Setting Disabled 4 250 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show 4 251 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Example Console config bridge ext gvrp Console config bridge ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 4 146 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 4 16 for a description of the d
316. mbers 3 89 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 90 A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available trunk ID If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation Web Click Port LACP Configuration Select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New Unit Port Unitl Port2 Unit Port3 Unit Port _ lt sAda P Ai ol Unit Ports Remove o J Uniti PortG Figure 3 39 LACP Port Configuratio PORT CONFIGURATION CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6 Just connect these ports to LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config if lacp 3 190 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 3 178 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 22 22 22 22 22 2d Configuration Name Port admin status Up Speed duplex Au
317. me diant eee eee eee 4 149 SNMP Commands sra int Todi Roe alee Ad a Siskel 4 149 SMMp COMMUNItY 2 ee EAA 4 150 snmp COMEACE A oh cc Mie DON coe Mita A aaga do koh duet hed ie 4 151 sninp location ot 4 151 Snip shOst sc 3 9 E A o 4 152 snmp enable traps 2 0 6 0 eee eee 4 154 SEO WES A A Cita La 4 155 DNS Commands ida ti 4 157 POSEA A ARs Rete an A Ii T Se ael 4 158 A A 4 159 ip domain HAE shes id Be hack hd Baga d A acd teehee ld 4 159 ip domain st td as 4 160 Ip MAME SELver a a a ies way 4 162 ip domain lookup 0 6 0 ccc cee eee eee 4 163 Show HOSTS h 5 a Weare al ad 4 164 SHOW ANS 405k ni Sa A 4 165 SHOW das CACHE i e i s ican duce A Na Jalan Sioa le Dos 4 165 Cleatedns cache via Ae Gah ay ae 4 166 xi CONTENTS Interface Commands sostenere Aire cee eee 4 167 intertace tad Pattee a heh er tt le dd e a JO Bl acto 4 168 eScriphon idad A di oc 4 168 speed duplex ia o io cos AE 4 169 HEFOHAUON A522 A AS aed 4 170 capabilities E Bad ote PEI DE aan da 4 172 Howcontrol ati A Sion Recs Shee oe 4 173 combo forced mode 0 eee eee 4 174 SHULAO WH seth Mata ada did 4 175 switchport broadcast packet rate 6 0 6 eee eee eee 4 176 cleat Counters ta 4 177 show interfaces status 6 cece eee eee 4 178 show interfaces counters 0 eee eee 4 179 show interfaces switchport 0 cece cece eee ee 4 181 Mitror Port Commands scott ia daa E has 4d 4 183 POL MONO A ida dc 4 183 show
318. mer support number at 800 762 4968 Customers ate responsible for all shipping charges from their facility to SMC SMC is responsible for return shipping charges from SMC to customer LIMITED WARRANTY WARRANTIES EXCLUSIVE IF AN SMC PRODUCT DOES NOT OPERATE AS WARRANTED ABOVE CUSTOMER S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT IN QUESTION AT SMC S OPTION THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SMC NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS SMC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLECT IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL SMC BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR FOR LOSS OF REVENUE LOSS OF BUSINESS OR OTHER FINANCIA
319. minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Command Attributes Current Time Displays the current time Name Assigns a name to the time zone Hours 0 12 The number of hours before after UTC Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after UTC Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or after west UTC Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply Clock Time Zone Current Time Jan 1 05 43 00 2001 Name Dhak a Hours 0 23 f Minutes 0 59 0 Direction C before utc after ute Figure 3 14 Setting the Time Zone CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after UTC 3 75 Console 3 29 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems The switch includes an onboard SNMP agent that continuously monitors the status of its hardware as well as the traffic passing through its ports A network manageme
320. mmand line interface See CLI community string 2 9 3 30 4 150 configuration settings saving or restoring 2 11 3 24 4 86 console port required connections 2 2 INDEX CoS configuring 3 163 4 255 DSCP 3 173 3 177 3 178 4 267 IP port priority 3 175 4 264 IP precedence 3 171 4 265 layer 3 4 priorities 3 169 4 263 queue mapping 3 165 4 260 queue mode 3 167 4 258 traffic class weights 3 168 4 259 D default gateway configuration 3 18 4 287 default priority ingress port 3 163 4 256 default settings system 1 7 DHCP 3 20 4 285 client 3 18 4 157 dynamic configuration 2 7 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP DNS default domain name 3 190 4 159 displaying the cache 3 195 domain name list 3 190 4 158 enabling lookup 3 190 4 163 name server list 3 190 4 162 static entries 3 193 Domain Name Service See DNS downloading software 3 22 4 86 DSCP enabling 3 170 4 267 mapping priorities 3 173 3 177 3 178 4 268 dynamic addresses displaying 3 114 4 202 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP Index 1 INDEX E edge port STA 3 129 3 132 4 221 event logging 4 58 F firmwate displaying version 3 14 4 83 upgrading 3 22 4 86 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway default 3 18 4 287 GVRP global setting 3 146 4 250 interface configuration 3 155 4 252 H hardware version displaying 3 14 4 83 HTTPS 3 38 4 42 HTTPS secure server 3 38 4 42 I IEEE 802 1
321. multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 280 ip igmp snooping query interval This command configures the query interval Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query interval seconds no ip igmp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds 4 279 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time This command configures the query report delay Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 30 Default Setting
322. mum path cost is 65 535 Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Enter the priority and path cost for an interface and click Apply MSTP Port Configuration MST Instance ID 0 y Priority MST Path Cost Port STA State 0 240 1 200000000 Forwarding fiz fioooco Discarding fie 10000 Discarding 128 rooo0 Discarding o fo Discarding 128 10000 zi Trunk Ol ei wl ni gt Figure 3 58 MSTP Port Configuration 3 140 VLAN CONFIGURATION CLI This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4 Console config interface ethernet 1 4 3 168 Console config if spanning tree mst port priority 0 3 226 Console config if spanning tree mst cost 50 3 224 Console config if VLAN Configuration Overview In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating
323. n Show 802 1x content Garp property Show GVRP information of interface Information of history Host information Information of interfaces IP information Show lacp statistic TTY line information Show the contents of logging buffers MAC access lists Set configuration of the address table Show management ip filter Map priority Specify marker Characteristics of the port Protocol vlan information Show information of public key Information of private VLAN Information of priority queue RADIUS server information The system configuration of running SNMP statistics Sntp Specify spanning tree Secure shell The system configuration of starting up Information of system Login by tacacs server Display information about terminal lines System hardware and software status Switch VLAN Virtual Interface ENTERING COMMANDS The command show interfaces will display the following information Console show interfaces counters Information of interfaces counters status Information of interfaces status switchport Information of interfaces switchport Console Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the CPEE S keywords starting with Console show s snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system
324. n System Up time 0 days 2 hours 3 minutes and 47 49 seconds System Name REDS System Location WC 9 System Contact Geoff MAC address 00 00 A3 42 00 80 Web server enable Web server port 80 Web secure server enable Web secure server port 443 POST result DUMMY TOS Loira PASS UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TOBE 2s4s sutuddceps dese Re aes PASS Timer VES ia Backes esa PASS PCT Device 1 Test 2 momo PASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Crossbar Int Loopback Test PASS Done All Pass Console 3 13 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Use the Switch Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management software as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch Number of Ports Number of built in RJ 45 ports and expansion ports Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board Internal Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply Redundant Power Status Displays the status of the redundant power supply CLI only Management Software 3 14 Loader Version Version number of loader code Boot ROM Version Version of Power On Self Test POST and boot code Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master i e ope
325. n ACL name in the Name field select the list type 1P Standard IP Extended or MAC and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list ACL Configuration Type Name Remove Edit Name david Type Standard Add Figure 3 27 Naming and Choosing ACLs CLI This example creates a standard IP ACL named bill Console config taccess list ip standard bill 3 118 Console config std acl 3 62 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Configuring a Standard IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules IP Specifies the source IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any Address Source IP address SubMask A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address a
326. n sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds Interval between time requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command is only applicable when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Example Console config sntp poll 60 Console Related Commands Related Commands 4 73 sntp client 4 72 This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax no sntp client SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup e g 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command The SNTP time query method is set to client mode when the first sntp client command is issued However if the sntp broadcast client command is issued then the no sntp broadcast client command must
327. n the DNS table that maps a host name to an IP address Use the no form to remove an entry Syntax no ip host name address address2 address8 name Name of the host Range 1 64 characters address Corresponding IP address e address2 address Additional corresponding IP addresses Default Setting No static entries Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name using this command a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device Example This example maps two address to a host name Console config ip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address 10 1 055 192 168 1 55 Alias Console DNS COMMANDS clear host This command deletes entries from the DNS table Syntax clear host name name Name of the host Range 1 64 characters e Removes all entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example clears all static entries from the DNS table Console config clear host Console config ip domain name This command defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names 1 e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation
328. nables SMTP event handling GC 4 69 show logging Displays SMTP event handler settings NE 4 69 sendmail PE 4 65 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE logging sendmail host This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages Use the no form to remove an SMTP server Syntax no logging sendmail host p_address ip_address YP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing However you must enter a separate command to specify each server To send email alerts the switch first opens a connection sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one and finally closes the connection To open a connection the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection or the first server configured by this command If it fails to send mail the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again If it still fails the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection Example Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 19 Console config 4 66 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages Syntax
329. nce in which the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry 3 73 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 74 Console config taccess list ip standard A2 Console config std acl permit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std acl exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl 3 118 3 119 3 123 35125 Configuring a MAC ACL Mask This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Command Usage You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Command Attributes e Source Destination MAC Use Any to match any address Host to specify the host address for a single node or MAC to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination MAC Bitmask Address of rule must match this bitmask VID Bitmask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask Ethernet Type Bitmask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask e Packet Format Bitmask A packet format must be specified in the tule ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Web Configure
330. nclude the appropriate tag in its transmitted frames e Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled e Check network cabling between the management station and the switch If you cannot connect using Telnet or SSH you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Cannot access e Ensure that you have set the terminal emulator program to the on board VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and set configuration the baud rate to any of the following 9600 19200 38400 program via a serial 57600 115200 bps pot confecnon e Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in the Installation Guide Forgot or lost the e Contact SMC Technical Support for help password B 1 TROUBLESHOOTING B 2 GLOSSARY Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC ie Layer 2 information Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and th
331. nd the mask for an address range Then click Add Standard ACL Name david Action Address SubMask Remove Permit 10 1 1 21 255 255 255 255 Remove IP lp S Address 168 9216 0 SubMask 255 255 240 0 Add Figure 3 28 Configuring Standard IP ACLs 3 63 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 64 CLI This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 3 119 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Configuring an Extended IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain either all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules e Src Dst IP Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any Src Dst Address Source or destination IP address e Src Dst SubMask Subnet mask for source or destination address See the description for SubMask on page 3 63 e Service Type Packet priority settings based on the following criteria Precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 TOS Type of Service level Range 0 15 DSCP DSCP priority level Rang
332. necessary network traffic or to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols Port Configuration You can manually configure the speed duplex mode and flow control used on specific ports or use auto negotiation to detect the connection settings used by the attached device Use the full duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of switch connections Flow control should also be enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded The switch supports flow control based on the IEEE 802 3x standard Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped 1 3 INTRODUCTION 1 4 Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional
333. network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance 3 133 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MST Instance 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 65 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 3 124 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree To use multiple spanning trees 1 Set the spanning tree type to MSTP STA Configuration page 3 121 2 Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI MSTP VLAN Configuration Note All VLANs are automatically added to the IST Instance 0 To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings Command Attributes e MST Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree Default 0 e Priority The priority of a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4
334. nfigurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable Yes Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Setting the Switch s IP Address This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management access over the network The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings IP address 0 0 0 0 and netmask 255 0 0 0 to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment 3 17 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 18 You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Command Attributes Management VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes By default all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1 However the management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN as long as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configuration Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not functi
335. nfigured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be ageregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 4 198 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Console show lacp 1 neighbors Channel group 1 neighbors 4 199 Partner Admin System ID Partner Oper System ID 32768 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 Partner Admin Port Number 1 Partner Oper Port Number 1 Port Admin Priority Port Oper Priority Admin Key 0 Oper Key 4 3
336. nformation Table 4 29 ACL Information Command Function Mode Page show access list Shows all ACLs and associated rules PE 4 148 show access group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4 149 access list This command shows all ACLs and associated rules as well as all the user defined masks Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Example permit any any Console Console show access list IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255 IP extended access list bob permit 10 7 1 1 0 0 0 255 any permit 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 any dport 80 permit 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 any protocol tcp control code 2 2 MAC access list jerry permit any 00 30 29 94 34 de ethertype 800 IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 show access group SNMP CoMMANDS This command shows the port assignments of ACLs Command Mode Privileged Executive Example Console Console show access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP standard access list david MAC access list jerry SNMP Commands Control access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to tr
337. ng via a command line interface CLI Note The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 2 6 The switch s HTTP Web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard Web browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5 0 and higher The switch s Web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network The switch s management agent also supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as SMC EliteView and HP OpenView 2 1 INITLAL CONFIGURATION The switch s Web interface CLI configuration program and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions Set user names and passwords for up to 16 users Set an IP interface for a management VLAN Configure SNMP parameters Enable disable any port Set the speed duplex mode for any port Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates Configure up to 255 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration Configure IGMP multicast filtering Upload and download s
338. ning Tree EEE 802 1w RSTP is the default MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority Default 32768 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Default 2 Minimum 1 Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20
339. nize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Out of Band Management Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1x Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Glossary 5 GLOSSARY Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Secure Shell SSH
340. nsole config logging history ram 0 Console config logging host 4 60 This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove a syslog server host Syntax no logging host host_ip_address host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage e By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP addresses e The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Example Console config logging host 10 1 0 3 Console config logging facility This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Use the no form to return the type to the default Syntax no logging facility Ape type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database Example Console config logging facility 19 Console config 4 61 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE logging trap This command enables th
341. nsole config if exit Console config if Filtering Management Access 3 78 You can specify the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through the web interface SNMP or Telnet Command Usage The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default Once you add an entry to a filter list access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address FILTERING MANAGEMENT ACCESS Command Attributes e Web IP Filter Configures IP address es for the web group SNMP IP Filter Configures IP addr
342. nsole show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console 4 162 DNS COMMANDS Related Commands ip domain name 4 159 ip domain lookup 4 163 ip domain lookup This command enables DNS host name to address translation Use the no form to disable DNS Syntax no ip domain lookup Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Atleast one name server must be specified before you can enable DNS Ifall name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled Example This example enables DNS and then displays the configuration Console config ip domain lookup Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 16 81 55 1010 55 Console 4 163 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands ip domain name 4 159 ip name server 4 162 show hosts 4 164 This command displays the static host name to address mapping table Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Note that a host name will be displayed as an alias if it is mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address 10 1 0 55 192 168 1 55 Alias 1 rd6 Console show
343. nsole show map ip precedence ethernet 1 5 Precedence mapping status enabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 5 0 0 Eth 1 5 Ice Sk Eth 1 5 2 2 Eth 1 5 3 3 Eth 1 5 4 4 Eth 1 5 5 5 Eth 1 5 6 6 Eth 1 5 WO oF Console 4 270 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 265 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 266 show map ip dscp This command shows the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp nterface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 o o Eth 1 1 1 o0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 de 00 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console 4 271 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Related Commands map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 267 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 268 Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Table 4 48 Multicast
344. nt station can access this information using software such as SMC EliteView or HP OpenView Access rights to the onboard agent ate controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication The options for configuring community strings trap functions and restricting access to clients with specified IP addresses are described in the following sections Setting Community Access Strings 3 30 You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability Indicates that the switch supports up to five community strings Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Default strings public read only access private read write access Range 1 32 characters case sensitive SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL e Access Mode Read Only Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Read Write Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Web Click SNMP Configuration Add new community strings as required select the access right
345. nth Range 1 31 month januaty february march april may june july august september october november december e year Year 4 digit Range 2001 2101 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows how to set the system clock to 15 12 34 February 1st 2002 Console calendar set 15 12 34 1 February 2002 Console show calendar This command displays the system clock Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 76 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console show calendar 15 12 34 February 1 2002 Console System Status Commands Table 4 17 System Status Commands Command Function Mode Page show Displays the contents of the configuration file PE 4 77 startup config stored in flash memory that is used to start up the system show Displays the configuration data currently in PE 4 80 running config use show system Displays system information NE 4 82 PE show usets Shows all active console and Telnet sessions NE 4 83 including user name idle time and IP address PE of Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE 4 83 PE show startup config This command displays the configuration file stored in non volatile memory that is used to start up the system Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 77 CO
346. o forced mode mode no combo forced mode mode copper forced Always uses the built in RJ 45 port copper preferred auto Uses the built in RJ 45 port if both combination types are functioning and the RJ 45 port has a valid link sfp forced Always uses the SFP port even if a module is not installed sfp preferred auto Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link 4 174 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting sfp preferred auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Example This forces the switch to use the built in RJ 45 port for the combination port 21 Console config interface ethernet 1 21 Console config if combo forced mode copper forced Console config 1f shutdown 4 175 This command disables an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no shutdown Default Setting All interfaces are enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons Example The following example disables port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if INTEREACE COMMANDS switchport broadcast packet rate This command c
347. obal Configuration Command Usage The first samp community command you enter enables SNMP SNMPv1 The no snmp community command disables SNMP Example Console config snmp community alpha rw Console config 4 150 SNMP CoMMANDS snmp contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax snmp contact string no snmp contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp contact Paul Console config Related Commands snmp location 4 151 snmp location This command sets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location ext no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None 4 151 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp location WC 19 Console config Related Commands snmp contact 4 151 snmp host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax samp host host addr community string version 1 2c no snmp host ost addr host addr Internet address of
348. ocol Bitmask Check the protocol field Service Type Check the rule for the specified priority type Options Precedence TOS DSCP Default TOS e Src Dst Port Bitmask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 e Control Bitmask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 3 72 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Web Configure the mask to match the required rules in the IP ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a specific host address or an address range Include other criteria to search for in the rules such as a protocol type or one of the service types Or use a bitmask to search for specific protocol port s or TCP control code s Then click Add ACL Mask IP Configuration Mask IP Ingress Table Dst IP Control Sre IP BitMask BitMask Protocol TOS Precedence DSCP BitMask Remove 255 255 255 255 192 163 1 0 Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Any Remove Remove All Entries Src IP Any gt Sre IP BitMask nooo Dst IP Any z Dst IP BitMask pooo Protocol BitMask I Enabled Service Type I TOS Enabled I Precedence Enabled IM DSCP Enabled Sre Port BitMask 0 65535 Dst Port BitMask 065535 Control BitMask 0 63 Aaa Figure 3 32 Configuring an IP based ACL CLI This shows that the entries in the mask override the precede
349. of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 22 RADIUS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4 95 radius server port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4 96 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4 97 radius server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 4 97 radius server timeout Sets the interval between sending GC 4 98 authentication requests show radius server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4 98 radius server host This command specifies the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server host host_ip_address no radius server host host_ip_address IP address of server 4 95 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting 10 1 0 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server host 192 168 1 25 Console config radius server port 4 96 This command sets the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server port port_number no radius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server port 181 Console config
350. of requests Range 1 10 Default 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1ix max req 2 Console config 4 106 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS dotlx port control This command sets the dotlx mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dotix port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dotlx port control e auto Requires a dotlx aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access e force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients either dotlx aware or otherwise force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config Htinterface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x port control auto Console config 1f 4 107 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dotlx operation mode This command allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1 X authorized port Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host Use the no form with the multi host max count keywords to restore the default maximum count Syntax dotlx operation mode single host multi host max count cound no dotlx operation mode multi host max count e single host Allows only a single host to connect to th
351. oming untagged IC 4 256 default frames queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or GC 4 258 Weighted Round Robin WRR queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the GC 4 259 priority queues queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the IC 4 260 priority queues show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4 261 show queue Shows round robin weights assigned to PE 4 262 bandwidth the priority queues show queue cos map Shows the class of service map PE 4 262 show interfaces Displays the administrative and PE 4 181 switchport operational status of an interface switchport priority default This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax switchport priority default defau t priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The priority number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero 4 256 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage 4 257 The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives b
352. ommand configures the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 4 220 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 Related Commands spanning tree cost 4 219 spanning tree edge port This command specifies an interface as an edge port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no spanning tree edge port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 221 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Command Usage e You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning t
353. on until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management access Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 0 0 0 e Default Gateway IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch BASIC CONFIGURATION Manual Configuration Web Click System IP Configuration Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to Static enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway then click Apply IP Configuration Management VLAN fi IP Address Mode Static y IP Address ra2168 154 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1253 MAC Address 00 30 F1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Figure 3 6 Manual IP Configuration CLI Specify the management interface IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 3 168 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 3 285 Console config if exit Consol
354. onfigures broadcast storm control Use the no form to disable broadcast storm control Syntax switchport broadcast packet rate rate no switchport broadcast rate Threshold level as a rate i e packets per second Range 500 262143 Default Setting Enabled for all ports Packet rate limit 500 packets per second Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold packets above that threshold are dropped e This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected interface However the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the switch Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 Console config if 4 176 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Statistics are only initialized for a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed
355. onsole config spanning tree mode This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp mstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w mstp Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Default Setting rstp Command Mode Global Configuration 4 207 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes that it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration del
356. ooooccocconmmmo eee 4 1 Acceso thei Cll iodo 4 1 Cotisole CONEA A a 24s 4 1 Telnet Connection A a Ga Be 4 2 CONTENTS Entefins Commands ia a Laie hws coder eee 4 4 Keywords and Arguments 11 00 00 c eee eee eee 4 4 Minimum Abbreviation 1 2 2 00 0000 4 4 Command Completion 000s 4 5 Getting Help on Commands 0 0 00 c cece eee eee 4 5 Showing Commands 0 0 0c rererere nnne 4 6 Partial Keyword Lookup 0 cece cee eee 4 7 Negating the Effect of Commands 0005 4 7 Using Command History 6 cee eee eee 4 7 Understanding Command Modes 00sec eens 4 8 Exec Commander AA id doa aida 4 8 Configuration Commands n s ssas sses cece cee eee 4 9 Command Line Processing 00 cece eee eee 4 11 Command Groups 1 0 6 0 eee eee eens 4 12 Line Commands i 008d are fects has Se a co dete 4 14 Malos BP EC ce daa tess Hash rae because o noo eS alae 4 15 A ON 4 16 PA AA A E AE Rabel bale 4 17 exec timeout A acon daa 4 18 password thresh irori eroan eee eee eens 4 19 SENT HMe A haat Ae 4 20 data DISS ti a A IE Rl 4 21 PA e dicho 4 22 DE nooo Meads tans una a ad A o 4 23 Stopblts Ea e caida in 4 24 dis COMME ici tie oe did da 4 24 shows O cid 4 25 General Commands es raae aae ea cece eens 4 26 cable E E EE E A E EE AS tele Ns an 4 26 disablen mraos A aia E 4 27 CONSULTE A Lt 4 28 SHOW NISTO adas nse stud ia ead E Poli ah ads Ta bag 4 28 reload ii A Nea
357. oping mrouter vlan 1 3 283 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service Command Attribute e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN for which to display port members e Multicast IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast setvice e Multicast Group Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast setvice 3 187 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 188 Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID ly Multicast IP Address 2241 1 12 Multicast Group Port List Unit Portl User Figure 3 83 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services CLI This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 along with the ports propagating the corresponding services The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured Console show bridge 1 multicast vlan 1 3 276 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast
358. or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 176 Lacp status Ingress Egress rate limit Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 4 190 Shows if rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit 4 186 VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 4 236 Ingress rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 4 238 Acceptable frame type Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only page 4 237 Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 4 239 Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames page 4 255 Gvrp status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled page 4 252 Allowed Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 4 240 Forbidden Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP page 4 241 4 182 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port Table 4 33 Mirror Port Commands Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4 183 show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4 184 port monitor This command con
359. or VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 500 18000 centiseconds Default 1000 Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default 1Q Trunk 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN However note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To adda trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Timer settings must follow this rule 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer VLAN CONFIGURATION Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration Fill in the required settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration GARP GARP ai Join Leave Timer Acceptable Ingress GVRP Timer Timer Trunk Port PVID Frame Type Filtering Status Centi Centi cok Mode Member Seconds Seconds 500 20 1000 60 3000 18000 1 ALL bd Ir Enabled I Enabled 1000 Hybrid 2h la y F Enabled En
360. ort within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 Console config show ip igmp snooping mrouter This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan v n id vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include Static or Dynamic 4 283 IP INTEREACE COMMANDS Example The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Ports Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static 2 Eth 1 12 Dynamic Console IP Interface Commands There are no IP addresses assigned to this switch by default You must manually configure a new address to manage the switch over your network or to connect the switch to existing IP subnets You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another network segment Basic IP Configuration Table 4 52 Basic IP Configuration commands Command Function Mode Page ip address Sets the IP address for the current IC 4 285 interface ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DCHP client PE 4 286 request ip default gateway Defines the default gatew
361. ost method This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 e short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Default Setting Long method Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Note that path cost page 4 219 takes precedence over port priority page 4 220 4 212 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config spanning tree transmission limit This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config spanning tree mst configuration Use
362. ost names received from a DNS client 1 e not formatted with dotted notation you can specify a default domain name or a list of domain names to be tried in sequential order If there is no domain list the default domain name is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used CONFIGURING DoMAIN NAME SERVICE When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS server on this switch and a domain name list has been specified the switch will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match When more than one name server is specified the servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response Note that if all name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled Command Attributes Domain Lookup Status Enables DNS host name to address translation Default Domain Name Defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names Range 1 64 alphanumeric characters Domain Name List Defines define a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names Range 1 64 alphanumeric characters 1 5 names Name Server List Specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Range 1 6 IP addresses Do not include the initial dot that separates the host n
363. oth untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used This switch provides eight priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port The default priority for all ingress ports is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 PRIORITY COMMANDS queue mode This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin WRR for the class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax queue mode strict wrr no queue mode strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues wrr W
364. otocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU i e STP BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Command Attributes Basie Configuration of Global Settings Spanning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode RSTP Rapid Span
365. ou should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 4 216 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree Example Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 2 5 Console config mstp mst priority This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance Use the no form to restore the default Syntax mst instance_id priority priority no mst nstance_ d priority 4 215 instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 64 e priority Priority of the a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting 32768 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance The device with the highest priority e lowest numerical value becomes the MSTI root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of 0 or
366. p source port source port bitmask destination port destination port port bitmask no permit deny tcp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence tos tos dscp dscp source port source port bitmask destination port destination port port bitmask control flag control flags flag bitmask e protocol number A specific protocol number Range 0 255 source Source IP address e destination Destination IP address 4 120 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match e host Keyword followed by a specific IP address precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 e tos Type of Service level Range 0 15 dsp DSCP priority level Range 0 64 source port Protocol source port number Range 0 65535 destination port Protocol destination port number Range 0 65535 port bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 control flags Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 flag bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match Includes TCP UDP or other protocol types Default Setting None Command Mode Extended ACL Command Usage All new rules are appended to the end of the list e Addre
367. p bit and no parity Set flow control to none Set the emulation mode to VT100 With HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys 1 When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000 make sure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in HyperTerminal s VT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs 2 Refer to Line Commands on page 4 14 for a complete description of console configuration options 3 Once you have set up the terminal correctly the console login screen will be displayed For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 4 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 4 12 2 3 INITLAL CONFIGURATION Remote Connections Prior to accessing the switch s onboard agent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default To manually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOT see Setting an IP Address on page 2 6 Note This switch supports four concurrent Telnet sessions After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access th
368. pe value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Console show lacp internal Channel group 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 4 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation ong timeout LACP activity Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Field Description LACPDUs Number of seconds before invalidating recetved LACPDU Internal information LACP System LACP system priority assigned to this port channel Priority LACP Port LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the Priority channel group Admin State Oper State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively co
369. pecify secure addresses for a port You may want to leave port security off for an initial training period 1 e enable the learning function to register all the current VLAN members on the selected port and then enable port security to ensure that the port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC addtess that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port Table 4 24 Port Security Commands Command Function Mode Page port security Configures a secure port IC 4 102 mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a GC 4 201 VLAN show mac address table Displays entries in the PE 4 202 bridge forwarding database port security 4 102 This command enables or configures port security Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses Syntax port security action shutdown trap trap and shutdown max mac count address couni no port security action max mac count e action Response to take when port security is violated e shutdown Disable port only e trap Issue SNMP trap message only trap and shutdown Issue SNMP trap message and disable port e max mac count address count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 20 AUTHENTICA
370. port 1 to this ACL Note that once the ACL is bound to an interface 1 e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Switch config access list ip extended 6 Switch config ext acl permit any any Switch config ext acl deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Switch config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Console configure Switch config access list ip mask precedence in Switch config ip mask acl mask protocol any any control flag 2 Switch config ip mask acl end Console sh access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console configure Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A6 in Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console show access list ip mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs Syntax show access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs 4 128 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list
371. public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254 15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 595664104869574278881 46206 519417467729848654686157177393901647793559423035774130980227370877945452408397 1752646358058176716709574804776117 3 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 055536161631051775940838686311092912322268285192543746031009371877211996963178 136627741416898513204911720483033925432410163799759237144901193800609025394840 848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150453 06393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 4 Set the Optional Parameters Set other optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size 5 Enable SSH Service Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH server on the switch 6 Configure Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact th
372. r IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Walid characters A Z a z 0 9 6699 66 99 CC 9D oe ag 0 he Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System File Firmware Enter the IP address of the TFTP server enter the file name of the software to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Transfer from Server To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Transfer Operation Code Image File from Server Current Operation Code Version 0 5 0 3 TFTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 i Source File Name Destination File Name ES4548C 08 V0 5 0 3N bix al Transfer from Server Figure 3 8 Operation Code Image File Transfer
373. raps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers without being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred Community Strings Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users or user groups and set the access level 2 9 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 10 The default strings are e public with read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e private with read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Note If you do not intend to utilize SNMP we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings If there are no community strings then SNMP management access to the switch is disabled To prevent unauthorized access to the switch via SNMP it is recommended that you change the default community strings To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community sting mode where
374. rating stand alone Web Click System Switch Information Switch Information BASIC CONFIGURATION Main Board Serial Number Number of Ports las Hardware Version Internal Power Status Active Management Software Loader Version 1 0 0 1 Boot ROM Version 1 0 0 1 Operation Code Version 1 1 0 4 Role Master le Figure 3 4 Switch Information CLI Use the following command to display version information Console show version Uniti Serial number Hardware version Number of ports Main power status Redundant power status Agent master Unit id Loader version Boot rom version Operation code version Console 48 Up not present sl L 0 053 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 4 3 15 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3 16 The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables Field Attributes Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Class of Service Configuration on page 3 163 Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static
375. re non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility 3 159 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 160 To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets Command Usage To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 3 149 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page Configuring Protocol Groups Create a protocol group for one or mote protocols Command Attributes Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Frame Type Frame type used by this protocol Options Ethernet RFC_1042 SNAP_8021h SNAP_other LLC_other
376. re trademarks of SMC Networks Inc Other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders LIMITED WARRANTY Limited Warranty Statement SMC Networks Inc SMC warrants its products to be free from defects in workmanship and materials under normal use and service for the applicable warranty term All SMC products carry a standard 90 day limited warranty from the date of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller SMC may at its own discretion repair or replace any product not operating as warranted with a similar or functionally equivalent product during the applicable warranty term SMC will endeavor to repair or replace any product returned under warranty within 30 days of receipt of the product The standard limited warranty can be upgraded to a Limited Lifetime warranty by registering new products within 30 days of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller Registration can be accomplished via the enclosed product registration card or online via the SMC web site Failure to register will not affect the standard limited warranty The Limited Lifetime warranty covers a product during the Life of that Product which is defined as the period of time during which the product is an Active SMC product A product is considered to be Active while it is listed on the current SMC price list As new technologies emerge older technologies become obsolete and SMC will at its discretion
377. ree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s VLAN Support Up to 255 groups port based protocol based or tagged 802 1Q GVRP for automatic VLAN learning private VLANs Class of Service Supports eight levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing which can be configured by VLAN tag or port Layer 3 4 priority mapping IP Precedence IP DSCP Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Layer 2 Additional Features BOOTP client CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol RMON Remote Monitoring groups 1 2 3 9 SMTP Email Alerts SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS Management Features In Band Management Telnet Web based HTTP or HTTPS SNMP manager or Secure Shell Out of Band Management RS 232 DB 9 console port Software Loading TFTP in band or XModem out of band SNMP Management access via MIB database Trap management to specified hosts RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 Statistics History Alarm Event Standards IEEE 802 3 Ethernet IEEE 802 3u Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3x Full duplex flow control ISO IEC 8802 3 IEEE 802 3z Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab 1000BASE T IEEE 802 3ac VLAN tagging IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1v Protocol based VLANs IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities IEEE 802 1p Prio
378. ree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config if Related Commands spanning tree portfast 4 222 spanning tree portfast This command sets an interface to fast forwarding Use the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax no spanning tree portfast Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 222 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed straight to Forwarding e Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding can achieve quicker converg
379. response to a security violation to issue a trap message Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap Related Commands shutdown 4 175 mac address table static 4 201 show mac address table 4 202 802 1x Port Authentication The switch supports IEEE 802 1x dot1x port based access control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol Table 4 25 802 1x Port Authentication Commands Command Function Mode Page authentication dot1x Sets the default authentication server GC 4 105 default type dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their GC 4 106 default values dot1x max req Sets the maximum number of times GC 4 106 that the switch retransmits an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session dot1x port control Sets dotlx mode for a port interface IC 4 107 dot1x operation mode Allows single or multiple hosts on a IC 4 108 dot1x port dot1x re authenticate Forces re authentication on specific PE 4 108 ports 4 104 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Table 4 25 802 1x Port Authentication Commands Command Function Mode Page dot1x re authentication Enables re authentication for all ports GC 4 109
380. ress IP ACL for ingress ports a FY KN Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 4 115 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 6 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports 7 If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Masks for Access Control Lists You can specify optional masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types i e Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Table 4 26 Access Control List Commands Command Groups Function Page IP ACLs Configure ACLs based on IP addresses T CP 4 116 UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code MAC ACLs Configure ACLs based on hardware addresses 4 135 packet format and Ethernet type ACL Information Display ACLs and associated rules shows ACLs 4 148 assigned to each port IP ACLs Table 4 27 IP ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters GC 4 118 configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs permit deny Filters packets matching a specified STD ACL
381. ributes 802 1x Re authentication Indicates if switch port requires a client to be re authenticated after a certain period of time 802 1x Max Request Count The maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Timeout for Quiet Period Indicates the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Timeout for Re authentication Period Indicates the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Timeout for TX Period The time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Supplicant timeout The time the switch waits for a client response to an EAP request Server timeout The time the switch waits for a response from the authentication server RADIUS to an authentication request Re authentication Max Count The number of times the switch will attempt to re authenticate a connected client before the port becomes unauthorized Web Click Security 802 1x Information 802 1X Information 802 1X Re authentication Disabled 802 1X Max Request Count A i Timeout For Quiet Period 60 seconds Timeout For Re authentication Period 3600 seconds Timeout For Tx Period 30 seconds Supplicant Timeout 30 seconds Server Timeout 110 seconds Re authentication Max
382. rity tags IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication ARP RFC 826 DHCP RFC 1541 A 3 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS HTTPS ICMP RFC 792 IGMP RFC 1112 IGMPv2 RFC 2236 RADIUS RFC 2618 RMON RFC 1757 groups 1 2 3 9 SNTP RFC 2030 SNMP RFC 1157 SNMPv2 REC 1907 SSH Version 2 0 Management Information Bases A 4 Bridge MIB RFC 1493 Entity MIB REC 2737 Ethernet MIB RFC 2665 Ether like MIB RFC 1643 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extensible SNMP Agents MIB RFC 2742 Forwarding Table MIB RFC 2096 IGMP MIB RFC 2933 Interface Group MIB RFC 2233 Interfaces Evolution MIB RFC 2863 IP Multicasting related MIBs MAU MIB RFC 2668 MIB II RFC 1213 Port Access Entity MIB IEEE 802 1x Private MIB Quality of Service MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIB RFC 2618 RMON MIB RFC 2819 RMON II Probe Configuration Group RFC 2021 partial implementation TACACS Authentication Client MIB TCP MIB RFC 2013 Trap RFC 1215 UDP MIB RFC 2012 APPENDIX B TROUBLESHOOTING Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Action Cannot connect using Ensure that you have configured the agent with a valid IP Telnet Web browser address subnet mask and default gateway ot SNMP software If you are trying to connect to the agent via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station must i
383. rotocol over LANs EAPOL to exchange authentication protocol messages with the client and a remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access tights When a client i e Supplicant connects to a switch port the switch i e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides its identity such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The client can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The current version of the firmware supports only the MD5 authentication method The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials such as a password or certificate The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet If authentication is successful the switch allows the client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked 3 51 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 52 802 1x client jajajaaj aaa Sua pana 1 Client attempts to access a switch port 2 Switch sends client an identity request 3 Client sends back
384. roup Configuring Groups 4 244 protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces 4 245 show protocol vlan protocol group ooooommm 4 246 show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group 4 247 Configuring Private VLANs 0 00 e eee eee ee 4 248 PVA ee a Se tae en Seen Maced va as 4 248 show pylatis g st suc Sil a Meal Sat ee ee 4 249 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 000005 4 250 bridge extoVip nis eden a teas sth 4 250 show Bridge extere aniei nia ie otha Aes 4 251 Switchpottevip Vict eet Yi Aaa Peo 4 252 show gvrp configuration 6 eee 4 252 Garp mier 2 AeA Ao a Cae Sea Re 4 253 show garp UNE shaded A ana ae 4 254 Porty Commands ad Me dbase De it oido 4 255 Priority Commands Layer 2 0 ee eee 4 256 switchport priority default 0 0 00 eee eee 4 256 QUEUE mode nin has ay ee te pooled ida ace duane ba 4 258 queue bandwidth sasish cd aA eal hee a apie S 4 259 QUEUE CO SAMA dit s2 52 ds o ia 4 260 show queue Modes tocino lod Bis hee ihe Baas E 4 261 show queue bandwidth 0 00 c ee eee eee 4 262 show queue COS Map 6 eee eee ee 4 262 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 ooooc oommcmmo 4 263 map ip port Global Configuration ooooo o oo o 4 264 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 264 map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 265 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 266 map ip dscp
385. rt Mirroring One or more ports mirrored to single analysis port Port Trunking Supports up to 6 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking LACP 1 1 INTRODUCTION Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Broadcast Storm Supported Control Static Address Up to 16K MAC addresses in the forwarding table IEEE 802 1D Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Bridge Store and Forward Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eliminating Switching bad frames Spanning Tree Supports standard STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802 1Q port based protocol based or private VLANs Traffic Default port priority traffic class map queue scheduling IP Prioritization Precedence or Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query Description of Software Features 1 2 The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port saturation Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Port based and protocol based VLANs plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum dela
386. s Range 1 15 CLI shows Queue ID Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Select the interface highlight a traffic class 1 e output queue enter a weight then click Apply Queue Scheduling Interface G Port 1 y C Trun gt Select Traffic Class 0 weight1 BN Traffic Class 1 weight 2 WRR Setting Table Traffic Class 2 weight 4 Traffic Class 3 weight 6 Traffic Class 4 weight8 y Weight Value 12 0 15 Figure 3 73 Configuring Class of Service for Each Ingress Queue 3 168 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION CLI The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console config queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 3 259 Console config exit Console show queue bandwidth 3 262 Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight 0 1 3 2 5 3 7 4 9 5 11 6 13 7 LS Information of Eth 1 2 Queue ID Weight Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame using the priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP port If priority bits are used the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the swi
387. s Received 21 Marker Sent 0 Marker Received 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 Console Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of an link aggregation Internal Configuration Information Table 3 6 LACP Settings Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU Internal information LACP System LACP system priority assigned to this port channel Priority LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group 3 96 PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 6 LACP Settings Field Description Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state arameters Oper State P Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collec
388. s are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Attributes Interface Indicates a port or trunk MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface WLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address VLAN or interface port or trunk Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type i e mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by F Interface Port fi gt Trunk z T MAC Address Do o F VLAN fi Address Table Sort Key Address y Query Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 VLAN 2 Unit 1 Port 1 Dynamic Current Dynamic Address Table Figure 3 50 Displaying the MAC Dynamic Address Table 3 114 ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 1 Console show mac address table interface ethernet 1 1 3 202 Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Permanent Eth 1 1 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 2 Learned Console Changing the Aging Time You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 1000000 seconds Defau
389. s from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 Current New private RW public RO lt lt Add Community String spiderman Remove Access Mode Read Write y Figure 3 15 Setting Community Access Strings CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config Hksnmp server community spiderman rw 3 150 Console config Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Traps indicating status changes ate issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as SMC Elite View or HP OpenView You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch 3 31 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 32 Command Attributes Trap Manager Capability This switch supports up to five trap managers Trap Manager IP Address Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Trap Manager Community String Community string sent with the notification operation Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Trap Version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps The default is version 1 Enable Authentication Traps Issues a trap message w
390. s if the link is Up or Down Speed Duplex Status Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Flow Control Status Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled Forced Mode Shows the forced preferred port type to use for combination ports 21 24 Copper Forced Copper Preferred Auto SFP Forced SFP Preferred Auto Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member Creation Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP 1 Port Information only 2 Trunk Information only PORT CONFIGURATION Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information Admin Oper PortiName Type Status Status 1000Base 1 TK Enabled Down 1000Base 2 TX Enabled Down 3 1000Base Enabled Down TX 1000Base 4 TX Enabled Down 1000Base 5 TX Enabled Up Figure 3 36 Field Attributes CLI Basic information Speed Duplex Status 1000full 1000full 1000full 1000full 100full Flow Control Autonegotiation Status None None None None None Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Forced Mode None None None None None Port Status Information Port type Indicates the port type 1000BASE T 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX or 100BASE FX e MAC address The physical layer address for
391. s the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed bps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps or auto Default Setting auto Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported If you select the auto option the switch will automatically detect the baud rate configured on the attached terminal and adjust the speed accordingly Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line 4 23 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE stopbits This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax stopbits 1 2 e 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line stopbits 2 Console config line disconnect Use this command to terminate an SSH Telnet or console connection Syntax disconnect session id session id The session identifier for an SSH
392. s to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 32137 Console config mac acl 3 69 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring ACL Masks 3 70 You can specify optional masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types ue Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Command Usage Up to seven entries can be assigned to an ACL mask e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules are entered First create the required ACLs and the ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Specifying the Mask Type Use the ACL Mask Configuration page to edit the mask for the Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL ACCESS C
393. sequence RADIUS Settings Server IP Address Address of authentication server Default 10 1 0 1 Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range 1 65535 Default 5 USER AUTHENTICATION e TACACS Settings Server IP Address Address of the TACACS server Default 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Note The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username on page 4 35 Web Click Security Authentication Settings To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence i e one to three methods fill in the parameters for
394. size pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 3150 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 139 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 49 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 0 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 0 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 0 Console 4 180 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show interfaces switchport This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport 1terface gt interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 24 Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 24 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second Lacp status Disabled Ingress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second Egress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console 4 181 INTEREACE COMMANDS Field Description Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled
395. so incorporated as part of the overall IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag The 802 1p priority may be set for either Layer 2 or IP frames The IP frame header also includes priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet The Type of Service octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service Note that the IP frame header can include either the IP Precedence or DSCP priority type The precedence for priority mapping by this switch is IP Precedence ot DSCP Priority and then 802 1p priority Command Attributes Port Port identifier Name Name of ACL Type Type of ACL IP or MAC Precedence IP Precedence value Range 0 7 DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value Range 0 63 802 1p Priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority For information on configuring ACLs see page 3 60 3 179 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 180 Web Click Priority ACL Marker Select a port and an ACL rule To specify a ToS priority mark the Precedence DSCP check box select Precedence or DSCP from the scroll down box and enter a priority To specify an 802 1p priority mark the 802 1p Priority check box and enter a priority Then click Add ACL Marker ACL Marker Configure Precedence 0 7 802 1p Port Name Type VOSCP 0 63 Priority Mame a r Pee r aa ACL Marker Mapping Port Nam
396. sole line vty end Console Related Commands show running config 4 80 4 79 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show running config 4 80 This command displays the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Use this command in conjunction with the show startup config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by cy symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information SNMP community strings Users names access levels and encrypted passwords VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for VLANs Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console show running config building running config please wait snmp server community private rw snmp server community public ro username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b323165
397. spanning tree algorithm for port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree spanning disabled Console config if spanning tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost cost The path cost for the port Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 4 219 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 e Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media e Path cost takes precedence over port priority When the spanning tree pathcost method page 212 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 Console config 1f spanning tree port priority This c
398. ss bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule However if DSCP is used then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified 4 121 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 122 The control code bitmask is a decimal number representing an equivalent bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 18 Example This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2
399. st first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging VLAN CONFIGURATION A tagged frames 3 E p E B VA VA VA VLAN Aware VU VLAN Unaware a tagged untagged E p frames em frames E VA VA VU VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadc
400. synchronized data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too shott error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size De
401. t 3 133 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 3 135 Displaying MSTP Interface Settings 3 137 MSTP Port Configuration 00 0 000 c eee 3 140 Enabling GVRP Status 0 snurr eee eee 3 146 Displaying Basic VLAN Information 3 147 Displaying VLAN Information by Port Membership 3 148 Creating Virtual LANs 0 00 c eee eee 3 150 Configuring VLAN Port Attributes 3 152 Assigning VLAN Port and Trunk Groups 3 154 Configuring VLAN Ports 0 6 0 0 6 6 cee eee 3 157 Enabling Private VLANS 000 e eee eee 3 158 PVLAN Uplink Downlink Port Configuration 3 159 Protocil VLAN Configuration ooooooccccooo 3 161 Mapping Protocols to VLANs ooooocccooomomo 3 162 Configuring Class of Service per Port 3 164 Configuring Ports and Trunks for Class of Service 3 166 Setting the Queue Mode 0 6 0 cee eee 3 167 Configuring Class of Service for Each Ingress Queue 3 168 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 Figure 3 87 FIGURES Setting IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status 3 Mapping IP Precedence to Class of Service Values 3 Mapping IP DSCP Priority to Class of Service Values 3 Globally Enabling the IP Port Priority Status 3 IP Port Priority Mapping oooooo
402. t or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with the SMC8642T 1 is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Vty 0 Note You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet COMMAND LINE INTEREACE Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port You can enter commands as follows e To enter a simple command enter the command keyword To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console show startup config To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0 smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is
403. t Neighbors Displays settings and operational state for 3 99 Information remote side Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each 3 101 port Trunk Broadcast Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each 3 101 Control trunk Mirror Port Sets the source and target ports for 3 103 Configuration mirroring Rate Limit 3 104 Input Sets the input rate limit for each port 3 104 Port Configuration Input Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3 104 Trunk Configuration Output Sets the output rate limit for each port 3 104 Port Configuration Output Sets the output rate limit for each trunk 3 104 Trunk Configuration Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3 106 Address Table 3 112 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or 3 112 VLAN Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the 3 114 Address Table 3 7 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 8 Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3 115 Spanning Tree 3 116 STA Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3 117 Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA 3 121 RSTP and MSTP Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3 126 Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3 126 Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3 130 Trunk Configuration
404. t Security 802 1x Configuration Enable dot1x globally for the switch modify any of the parameters required and then click Apply 802 1X Configuration 802 1X Re authentication I Enable 802 1X Max Request Count 1 10 le Timeout For Quiet Period 1 65535 50 seconds Timeout For Re authentication Period 1 65535 3600 seconds Timeout For Tx Period 1 65535 o seconds Figure 3 24 802 1x Configuration CLI This enables re authentication and sets all of the global parameters for 802 1x Console config dot1ix re authentication 3 109 Console config dot1ix max req 5 3 106 Console config tdot1x timeout quiet period 40 3 109 Console config dot1x timeout re auth 5 3 110 Console config dot1lx timeout tx period 40 3 110 Console config authentication dot1x default radius 3 106 Console config Configuring Port Authorization Mode When dot1x is enabled you need to specify the dot1x authentication mode configured for each port Command Attributes e Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port e Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1 X authorized port Range Single Host Multi Host Default Single Host USER AUTHENTICATION Max Count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi Host operation mode is selected Range 1 20 Default 5 Mode Sets
405. t interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the user s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively no login selects no authentication When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode LINE COMMANDS This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers Example Console config line login local Console config line Related Commands username 4 35 password 4 17 password This command specifies the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password e 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password e password Character string that specifies the line password Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state 4 17 COMMAND LINE INTERFAC
406. t is level 15 The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration 4 36 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 4 26 The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config Related Commands enable 4 26 IP Filter Commands Table 4 10 IP Filter Commands Command Function Mode Page management Configures IP addresses that are allowed GC 4 38 management access show management Displays the switch to be monitored or PE 4 39 configured from a browser 4 37 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE management This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no management all client http client snmp client telnet client start address end address e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP Web and Telnet groups http client Adds
407. t regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Configuration Changes The number of times
408. t service Note Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Command Attributes IGMP Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled Act as IGMP Querier When enabled the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Enabled IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Range 5 30 seconds Default 10 IGMP Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 3 183 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH IGMP Version Sets the protocol version for compat
409. tch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority IP Precedence ot DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other 3 169 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority 3 170 The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority Select one of the methods or disable this feature Command Attributes e Disabled Disables both priority services This is the default setting IP Precedence Maps layer 3 4 priorities using IP Precedence IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping Web Click Priority IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Select Disabled IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll down menu IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence y Figure 3 74 Setting IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status CLI The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch Console config map ip precedence 3 265 Console config CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Mapping IP Precedence The Type of Service
410. tchport native vlan v an id no switchport native vlan vlan id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config if VLAN COMMANDS switchport allowed vlan This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport allowed vlan add v an list tagged untagged remove v an list no switchport allowed vlan add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove v an ist List of VLAN identifiers to remove vlan list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting All ports are assigne
411. tem Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled Web server port Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface e Web secure server Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled Web secure server port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface POST result Shows results of the power on self test BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System System Information Specify the system name location and contact information for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet SMC Networks SMC8648T Manager system Name R amp Ds Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 37 Loc ation wc 9 Contact Geoff System Up Time 0 days 1 hours 54 minutes and 55 5 seconds Connect to textual user interface Send mail to technical support TER Connect to SMC Web Page El Figure 3 3 System Information CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config hostname R amp D 5 3 34 Console config snmp server location WC 9 3 151 Console config snmp server contact Geoff 3 151 Console config exit Console show system 3 82 System description SMC Networks SMC8624T System informatio
412. ters click Apply Aggregation Port 120 Set Port Actor Port System Priority Admin Key Port Priority 065535 0 65535 0 65535 1 B f e 2 B h jhe af zo 128 af p hs sib o 256 sf f 512 Figure 3 40 LACP Aggregation Port Configuration 3 93 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 94 CLI The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1 6 Ports 1 4 are used as active members of the LAG ports 5 and 6 are set to backup mode Console config interface ethernet 1 1 3 168 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 3 192 Console config if Htlacp actor admin key 120 3 193 Console config if Htlacp actor port priority 128 3 195 e config 1f Htexit Conso Conso e config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if Htlacp actor admin key 120 Console config if Htlacp actor port priority 512 Console config if end Console sh lacp sysid 3 196 Channel Group System Priority System MAC Address 1 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 2 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 3 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 4 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 5 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 6 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 Console show lacp 1 internal 3 196 Channel group 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 120 Console Displaying LACP Port Counters You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages Counter Information Table 3 5 LACP Port Counter
413. the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree This is always 0 for the CIST Vlans configuration VLANs assigned to the CIST Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Root Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Root For
414. the authentication mode to one of the following options Auto Requires a dotlx aware client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dotlx aware or otherwise Force Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dotlx aware or otherwise Authorized Yes Connected client is authorized No Connected client is not authorized Blank Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click Security 802 1x Port Configuration Select the authentication mode from the drop down box and click Apply 802 1X Port Configuration Port Status Operation Mode ort Mode Authorized Supplicant Trunk 1 Enabied SingleHosty 5 ForceAutorzed Yes 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 Enabled Mul Host ho Force Authorized E 00 00 00 00 00 00 3 Enabled Single Host 5 Force Authorized y 00 00 00 00 00 00 4 Enabled Single Host y 5 Force Authorized 00 00 00 00 00 00 5 Enabled Single Host 5 Force Authorized y 00 00 00 00 00 00 el Figure 3 25 802 1x Port Configuration 3 57 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 58 CLI This example sets the authentication mode to ena
415. the link type for RSTP IC 4 223 MSTP spanning tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance IC 4 224 in the MST spanning tree mst Configures the priority of an instance IC 4 226 port priority in the MST spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU PE 4 227 protocol migration format show spanning tree Shows spanning tree configuration for PE 4 228 the common spanning tree 1 e overall bridge a selected interface or an instance within the multiple spanning tree show spanning tree mst Shows the multiple spanning tree PE 4 230 configuration configuration spanning tree This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled 4 206 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down Example This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree C
416. the mask to match the required rules in the MAC ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a host address or an address range Use a bitmask to search for specific VLAN ID s or Ethernet type s Or check for rules where a packet format was specified Then click Add ACL Mask MAC Configuration Mask MAC Ingress Table Source MAC Destination MAC VID EthernetType PacketFormat Pomoy BitMask BitMask Bitmask Bitmask Bitmask ARONS 00 11 11 11 11 11 lany B s00 Enable Remove Remove All Entries Source MAC Source MAC BitMask Destination MAC Destination MAC BitMask VID Bitmask Ethernet Type Bitmask Packet Format Bitmask Aad Figure 3 33 Configuring a MAC based ACL 3 75 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 3 136 Console config mac acl permit any any 3 137 Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 Ef f ff ff ff ff any vid 3 3 137 Console config mac acl end Console show access list 3 148 MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in 3 139 Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any
417. the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Note that when the LAG is no longer used the port channel admin key is reset to 0 4 194 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if lacp admin key 3 Console config if lacp port priority This command configures LACP port priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner port priority priority no lacp actor partner port priority e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link priority LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority e If an active port link goes down the backup port with the highest priority is selected to replace the downed link However if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port e Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next t
418. therChannel standard The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk 3 87 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 88 Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage When configuring static trunks you statically may not be able to link switches of configured different types depending on the A yA manufacturers implementation TETTE However note that the static trunks gt i active on this switch are Cisco links EtherChannel compatible e To avoid creating a loop in the MAMAR network be sure you add a static trunk via the configuration interface before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface Web Click Port Trunk Membership Enter a trunk ID of 1 6 in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Membership Member List Current New Trunk Unitl Port Trunk1 Unit Port2 Add Tukas Remove Pon 1 Figure 3 38 Static Trunk
419. this port To access this item on the web see Setting the Switch s IP Address on page 3 17 Configuration Name Interface label Trunk Member Port admin Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled i e up or down e Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice 3 81 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 82 Capabilities Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the web see Configuring Interface Connections on page 3 48 The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control FC Supports flow control Broadcast storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled Broadcast storm limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 500 262143 packets per second Flow control Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled Port Security Shows if port security is enabled or disabled Max MAC count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 20 addresses Port security action Shows
420. thorized Reauth Count Number of times connecting state is re entered Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier packet received from the Authentication Server Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize reauthenticate Example Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters reauth enabled yes reauth period 300 quiet period 350 tx period 300 supp timeout 30 server timeout 30 reauth max 2 max req 2 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status 1 1 disabled 1 2 enabled Operation Mode Single Host Single Host 1 25 1 26 disabled disabled Single Host Single Host 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 802 1X is enabled on port 1 2 Status Unauthorized Operation mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 00 00 00 00 00 Current Identifier 0 Authenticator State Machine State Connecting Reauth Count 3 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 0 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize Console AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Mode Authorized ForceAuthorized n a Auto n a ForceAuthorized n a ForceAuthorized n a 4 113 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Access Control List Commands 4 11
421. time 4 200 Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4 205 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port membership for VLAN groups also enables or configures private VLANs and protocol VLANs 4 231 GVRP and Bridge Extension Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning shows the configuration for the bridge extension MIB 4 250 Priority Sets port priority for untagged frames selects strict priority or weighted round robin relative weight for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP traffic types IP precedence and DSCP 4 255 Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query parameters and specifies ports attached to a multicast router 4 272 IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch 4 284 4 13 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations NE Normal Exec PE Privileged Exec GC Global Configuration ACL Access Control List Configuration Line Commands 4 14 IC Interface Configuration LC Line Configuration VC VLAN Database Configuration MST Multiple Spanning Tree You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the servers serial port These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual
422. ting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be ageregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate e LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 3 97 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port LACP Port Internal Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Internal Information Member Port z Trunk ID LACP System Priority ILACP Port Priority Admin Key Oper Key LACPDUS Interval secs 30 seconds Admin State Expired 3 Oper State Expired 7 Admin State Defaulted Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing Oper State Distributing Admin State Collecting Oper State Collecting Admin State Oper State Synchronization Syn
423. tion of VLAN 1 MAC address 00 00 AB CD 00 00 Console show interfaces counters This command displays interface statistics Syntax show interfaces counters nterface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces 4 179 INTEREACE COMMANDS Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Showing Port Statistics on page 3 106 Example Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 7 Iftable stats Octets input 30658 Octets output 196550 Unicast input 6 Unicast output 5 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 3064 Broadcast input 262 Broadcast output 1 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 227208 Packets 3338 Broadcast pkts 263 Multi cast pkts 3064 Under
424. to Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Flow control status Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Created by Lacp Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Console Configuring LACP Parameters Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria e Ports must have the same LACP System Priority e Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key e However if the port channel Admin Key is set page 4 142 then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group 3 91 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 92 Note If the port channel admin key lacp admin key page 4 194 is not set through the CLI when a channel group is formed e it has a null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group lacp admin key as described in this section and on page 4 193 Command Attributes Set Port Actor This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link i e the ports on this switch Port Port number Range 1 24 System Priority LACP system priority is used to determine link ageregation group LAG membership and to identify
425. to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list ip standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address e extended Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address and other more specific criteria acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An egress ACL must contain all deny rules When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one tule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list ip standard david Console config std acl 4 118 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Related Commands permit deny 4 119 ip access group 4 129 show ip access list 4 123 permit deny Standard ACL This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any source bitmask host source any Any source IP address e source Source IP address bitmask Decimal number repres
426. ton to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply STA Port Configuration I Priority Path Cost Admin Edge Port Migration rank PortiSpanning Ls babi San 0240 lin 200000000 Admin Link TyPe East Forwarding Enable Forwarding f 28 100000 Auto F Enabled D Enabled M Enable Discarding 128 10000 Auto Z F Enabled I Enabled M Enable Discarding 128 10000 Auto z M Enabled D Enabled F Enable Discarding 128 froooo fauto F Enabled I Enabled M Enable Discarding 128 10000 Auto al F Enabled r Enabled zj Figure 3 55 Configuring Spanning Tree Algorithm per Port CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 7 3 168 Console config if no no spanning tree spanning disabled 3 219 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 3 220 Console config if Hspanning tree cost 50 3 219 Console config if spanning tree link type auto 3 223 Console config if no spanning tree edge port 3 221 Console config if spanning tree protocol migration 3 227 Console config 1f Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the
427. tos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231 Broadcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses for all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port Setting Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the addr
428. ts in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port channel STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria e Ports must have the same LACP system priority e Ports must have the same port admin key Ethernet Interface If the port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed 1 e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group e However if the port channel admin key is set then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group Ifa link goes down LACP port priority is used to select the backup link 4 188 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE channel group This command adds a port to a trunk Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Range 1 6 Default Setting The current port will be added to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard e Use no channel group to remove a port gro
429. u enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection e A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x and Netscape Navigator 4 x or later versions The following Web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 4 76 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 e To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 40 Also refer to the copy command on page 4 86 Example Console config ip http secure server Console config Related Commands ip http secure port 4 44 copy tftp https certificate 4 86 4 43 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip http secure port 4 44 This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL
430. uding ingress and egress tagging mode ingress filtering PVID and GVRP Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members 4 242 Information and MAC addtesses Configuring Protocol Configures protocol based VLANs based on 4 243 VLANs frame type and protocol Configuring Private Configures private VLANs including uplink and 4 248 VLANs downlink ports Editing VLAN Groups Table 4 39 Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add GC 4 232 change and delete VLANs vlan Configures a VLAN including VID VC 4 233 name and state VLAN COMMANDS vlan database This command enters VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Use the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finishing configuration changes you can display the VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 242 4 232 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE vlan This command configures a VLAN Use the no form to r
431. ues should be assigned to interfaces attached to faster media and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media e Path cost takes precedence over interface priority Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst port priority 4 226 4 225 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree mst port priority This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst nstance_ d port priority priority no spanning tree mst nstance_ d port priority instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes e priority Priority for an interface Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple spanning tree If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same the interface with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config i
432. ult Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication login radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Console config Console config authentication login radius Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 4 35 RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database
433. ulticast filtering configures 3 182 parameters for multicast query Multicast Router Displays the ports that are attached to a 3 185 Port Information neighboring multicast router for each VLAN ID Static Multicast Router Assigns ports that are attached to a 3 186 Port Configuration neighboring multicast router NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this 3 187 Table switch including multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGMP Member Indicates multicast addresses associated 3 188 Port Table with the selected VLAN DNS General Configuration Enables DNS configures domain name and 3 190 domain list and specifies IP address of name servers for dynamic lookup Static Host Table Configures static entries for domain name 3 193 to address mapping Cache Displays cache entries discovered by 3 195 designated name servers 3 11 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Basic Configuration Displaying System Information 3 12 You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name location and contact information Field Attributes System Name Name assigned to the switch system Object ID MIB II object ID for switch s network management subsystem e Location Specifies the system location e Contact Administrator responsible for the system Sys
434. ummarizes the web page configuration buttons Table 3 1 Configuration Options Button Action Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply or Apply Changes Refresh Immediately updates values for the current page Apply Sets specified values to the system Apply Changes Sets specified values to the system Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure that Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu Tools Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button The web agent displays an image of the switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Active i e up or down Duplex i e half or full duplex or Flow Control 1 e with or without flow control Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3 84 SMC Networks Mode B unkup F Link Down Figure 3 2 Panel Display Main Menu NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the switch and all its ports or monitor net
435. up from a trunk Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch Example The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11 Console Console Console Console config interface port channel 1 config if exit config interface ethernet 1 11 config if 4 189 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS lacp This command enables 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the current interface Use the no form to disable it Syntax no lacp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID e Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails 4 190 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows LACP enabled on ports 11 13 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces status port channel 1 command shows that Trunk has been established Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if Htlacp
436. upported protocols Port Configuration Maps a protocol group to a VLAN 3 161 Priority 3 163 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3 163 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3 163 Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output 3 165 queues 3 9 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 10 Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page Traffic Classes Status Enables disables traffic class priorities not NA implemented Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or 3 167 Weighted Round Robin Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin 3 168 queueing IP Precedence Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP 3 170 DSCP Priority Status Priority or disables both IP Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority mapping 3 171 the precedence tag to a class of service value IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point 3 173 priority mapping a DSCP tag to a class of service value IP Port Priority Status Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority 3 175 IP Port Priority Sets TCP UDP port priority defining the 3 175 socket number and associated class of service value ACL CoS Priority Sets the CoS value and corresponding 3 177 output queue for packets matching an ACL tule ACL Marker Change traffic priorities for frames 3 178 matching an ACL rule IGMP Snooping 3 181 IGMP Configuration Enables m
437. uration Commands Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch settings These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in non volatile storage use the copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes e Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as hostname and snmp server community e Access Control List Configuration These commands are used for packet filtering 4 9 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 10 Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include command such as parity and databits e VLAN Configuration Includes the command to create VLAN groups e Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration These commands configure settings for the selected multiple spanning tree instance To enter the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands Console configure Console config To enter the other modes at the configuration prompt type one of the following
438. uration Global Access Control List Interface Line Multiple Spanning Tree VLAN Database You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes Exec Commands 4 8 When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin The system will now display the Console command prompt ENTERING COMMANDS You can also enter Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged level password super page 4 36 To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following user names and passwords Username admin Password admin login password CLI session with the switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Username guest Password guest login password CLI session with the switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console enable Password privileged level password Console Config
439. urce address of rule must match this bitmask destination bitmask Destination address of rule must match this bitmask precedence Check the IP precedence field tos Check the TOS field e dscp Check the DSCP field source port Check the protocol source port field e destination port Check the protocol destination port field port bitmask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 control flag Check the field for control flags flag bitmask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode IP Mask 4 125 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 126 Command Usage e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered e First create the required ACLs and ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface Ifyou enter dscp you cannot enter tos or precedence You can enter both tos and precedence without dscp e Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Example This example creates an IP ingress mask with two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a m
440. ured values for authentication timeout and retries show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4 55 show public key Shows the public key for the specified user PE 4 56 or for the host show users Shows SSH users including privilege level PE 4 83 and public key type The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or viaa RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified by the authentication login command on page 4 94 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair Use the ip ssh crypto host key generate command to create a host public private key pair SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS 2 Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a
441. ured with the same MST instances SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Example Console config mstp revision 1 Console config mstp Related Commands name 4 216 max hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded Use the no form to restore the default Syntax max hops hop number hop number Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree Range 1 40 Default Setting 20 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage A MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols Therefore the message age for BPDUs inside a MSTI region is never changed However each spanning tree instance within a region and the internal spanning tree IST that connects these instances use a hop count to specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU Each bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU When the hop count reaches zero the message is dropped Example Console config mstp max hops 30 Console config mstp 4 218 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree spanning disabled This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Syntax no spanning tree spanning disabled Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example This example disables the
442. ust be disabled before you can execute this command Example Console ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 52 ip ssh save host key 4 54 no ip ssh server 4 48 4 53 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip ssh save host key Use this command to save host key from RAM to flash memory Syntax ip ssh save host key dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type Default Setting Saves both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console ip ssh save host key dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 52 show ip ssh Use this command to display the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ssh SSH Enabled version 1 99 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console 4 54 show ssh SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Use this command to display the current SSH server connections Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ssh Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console Table 4 13 SSH Information Field Description Session The session number Range 0 3 Version The Secute Shell version number State The authentication negotiat
443. ust copy the running configuration file to the start up configuration file using the copy command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Enter the name of the start up file Press lt Enter gt Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 2 11 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Managing System Files 2 12 The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program Web interface or SNMP The switch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are Configuration This file stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup A file named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 3 24 for more information e Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code runs the switch operations and
444. ute that can be used when a node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs When using STP or RSTP it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all VLAN members Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily isolate some of the group members MSTP an extension of RSTP is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups Once you specify the VLANs to include in a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTD the protocol will automatically build an MSTI tree to maintain connectivity among each of the VLANs MSTP maintains contact with the global network because each instance is treated as an RSTP node in the Common Spanning Tree CST Displaying Global Settings You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen 3 117 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Field Attributes 3 118 Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages a
445. ward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states 1 e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information 3 119 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 120 that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Root Hold Time The interval in seconds during which no more than two bridge configuration protocol data units shall be transmitted by this node e Max hops The max number of hop counts for the MST region Remaining hops The remaining number of hop counts for the MST instance e Transmission limit The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Information Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 00004BC D0000 Bridge ID 32768 0000ABCD0000 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 2 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d0 hO min 35 s Figure 3 52 Displaying the Spanning Tree Algorithm SPANNING TREE ALGOR
446. where ip address is the switch 3 Type exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt 4 To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config Htinterface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 Console config Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received You therefore need to use the ip dhcp restart client command to start broadcasting service requests Requests will be sent periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway 2 7 INITLAL CONFIGURATION 2 8 If the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mod
447. witch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 e However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound the ports should not exceed 20 e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in an ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail e Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports User defined rules in the Ing
448. work conditions The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page System 3 12 System Information Provides basic system description including 3 12 contact information Switch Information Shows the number of ports hardware 3 14 firmware version numbers and power status Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 3 16 IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3 17 File 3 22 Firmware Manages code image files 3 22 Configuration Manages switch configuration files 3 24 Reset Restarts the switch 3 26 SNTP 3 27 Configuration Configures SNTP client settings including 3 27 broadcast mode or a specified list of servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3 29 SNMP 3 30 Configuration Configures community strings and related 3 30 trap functions Security 3 33 Passwords Assigns a new password for the current user 3 33 Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence 3 34 RADIUS and TACACS HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3 38 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 6 Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page SSH 3 41 Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3 46 Host Key Settings Generates the host key pair public and 3 43 private Port Security Con
449. y Any MAC source or destination address e host A specific MAC address e source Source MAC address destination Destination MAC address range with bitmask address bitmask Bitmask for MAC address in hexidecimal format e vid VLAN ID Range 1 4095 4 137 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 138 vid bitmask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4095 e protocol A specific Ethernet protocol number Range 600 fff hex e protocol bitmask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex For all bitmasks 1 means care and 0 means ignore Default Setting None Command Mode MAC ACL Command Usage e New rules are added to the end of the list The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet IT formatted packets A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include the following 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Example This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl Related Commands access list mac 4 136 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS show mac access list This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs Syntax show mac access list ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Comm
450. y 10 1 0 254 Console 4 288 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain 4 286 ping This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping ost count corn size size host IP address or IP alias of the host count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 default 5 size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 default 32 The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the switch adds header information Default Setting This command has no default for the host Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached e Following are some results of the ping command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging 4 289 IP INTEREACE COMMANDS Example Console ping 10 1 0 9 Type ESC to a
451. y admin dsa Console ip ssh crypto host key generate Use this command to generate the host key pair i e public and private Syntax ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type Default Setting Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e This command stores the host key pair in memory i e RAM Use the ip ssh save host key command to save the host key pair to flash memory Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process Otherwise you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console 4 52 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Related Commands ip ssh crypto zeroize 4 53 ip ssh save host key 4 54 ip ssh crypto zeroize Use this command to clear the host key from memory i e RAM Syntax ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type Default Setting Clears both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command clears the host key from volatile memory RAM Use the no ip ssh save host key command to clear the host key from flash memory The SSH server m
452. y all file information Console dir file name file type startup size byte diag_0060 Boot Rom image Ye 111360 run 01642 Operation Code N 1074304 run 0200 Operation Code Y 1083008 Factory Default_Config cfg Config File N 2574 startup Config File Y 2710 Total free space 0 Console whichboot This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 91 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot file name file type startup size byte diag _0060 Boot Rom image Y 111360 run 0200 Operation Code Y 1083008 startup Config File Ye 2710 Console boot system This command specifies the image used to start up the system Syntax boot system boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code The colon is required filename Name of the configuration file or image name Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e A colon is required after the specified file type If the file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file 4 92 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Examp
453. y for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering provides support for real time network applications Some of the management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to restore the switch configuration settings DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES Authentication This switch authenticates management access via the console port Telnet or web browser User names and passwords can be configured locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server 1 e RADIUS or TACACS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1x protocol This protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request a user name and password from the 802 1x client and then verifies the client s right to access the network via an authentication server Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the web SSH for secure management access over a Telnet equivalent connection IP address filtering for SNMP web Telnet management access and MAC address filtering for port access Access Control Lists ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type ACLs can by used to improve performance by blocking un
454. y this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The eight values are mapped one to one to the Class of Service categories by default but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for specific network applications Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addtesses Glossary 4 GLOSSARY Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchro
455. yed have been accumulated since the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as SMC EliteView or HP OpenView Statistical Values Table 3 8 Port Statistics Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface ae ncluding framing characters Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Received Multicast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Received Broadcast The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to Packets a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 8 Port Statistics Parameter Description Received Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen Packets to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Received Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Re
456. ystem firmware via TFTP Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP Configure Spanning Tree parameters Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing Configure up to 6 static or LACP trunks Enable port mirroring Set broadcast storm control on any port Display system information and statistics Required Connections 2 2 The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the switch You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide CONNECTING TO THE SWITCH To connect a terminal to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows Notes Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 Set to any of these baud rates 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Note Set to 9600 baud to view all system initialization messages Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 sto

SMC Networks SMC8624/48T User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents